JP2009247788A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for improving the amusement of a game by diversifying a step-up notice performance. <P>SOLUTION: A first step-up notice performance includes a main step-up notice capable of executing notice performances A-D which change stepwise, and a branch step-up notice performance to be branched into the notice performance G of a different system different from the notice performances included in the main step-up notice without changing to the notice performance C of the next stage in the middle of executing the main step-up notice. Then, branching into the notice performance G of the different system is executed in timing of the middle of executing the notice performance B in the main step-up notice. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result, the player can The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine that is controlled to an advantageous specific gaming state.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player (specifically, a state in which a gaming machine is controlled).

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be called a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In addition, an effect of notifying that there is a high possibility that a big hit or reach (particularly super reach) will occur is called a notice effect. The reach effect is an effect in the state where the symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol are aligned. Naturally, it can be executed even after the symbols other than the symbols to be the final stop symbols are prepared.

  As such a gaming machine, a plurality of characters are successively switched at a predetermined timing as a notice effect that is performed after the variable display device starts variable display of the symbol and until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A plurality of types of notice effects (referred to as “step-up notice effects” in the present application) are prepared in advance, which are the notice effects, and the display timing (switching timing) of each character (each step effect) in the notice effects is different. Among the up-notice effects, one that selects and executes one step-up effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-118416 (paragraphs 0188 to 0194 and FIG. 18 etc.)

  In general, the step-up notice effect is configured such that if the step-up notice effect ends during the step-up (without going to the final step), the reliability of the jackpot for the reach that develops thereafter is not increased. For example, if the step-up notice effect is composed of three steps (step effect and notice effect), even if the step-up notice effect ends and develops to reach in the first step, the reach is not much. You won't have a big hit.

  In this case, the first step (first step) and the second step (second step) can appear frequently at the time of deviation, but the last step (third step) is the first step or second step. Since the rate of appearance is lower than that of the step, the rate at which the notice effect is ended in the first step and the second step is increased in the normal game. As a result, the player always sees only the same notice effect, and is excited about the notice effect.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by giving variations (diversity) to the step-up notice effect.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display unit (first special symbol display 8a, first symbol) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and an effect symbol) that can be identified. 2 having a special symbol display 8b and an effect display device 9), and when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), the identification that is advantageous to the player A gaming machine that is controlled to a gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a pre-determining means (for example, gaming control) that determines whether or not to obtain a specific display result before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. A portion of the microcomputer 560 that executes the process of step S61), and a notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a specific display result based on the determination result of the prior determination means The notice effect determining means for determining the state (for example, the part for executing the notice effect setting process in step S517 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and the notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means ( For example, the notice effect is a notice that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order. The ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages up to the stage where the effects (for example, the notice effects A to D) can be executed and the specific display result is used as compared with the case where the specific display result is not used. Step-up notice including high step-up notice effect (for example, first step-up notice effect) The output includes at least three stages of notice effects including a first notice effect (eg notice effect A), a second notice effect (eg notice effect B) and a third notice effect (eg notice effect C) that change in stages. An executable normal step-up notice effect (for example, main step-up shown in FIG. 70) and a notice effect of the next stage (for example, notice effect B or notice effect C) in the middle of execution of the normal step-up notice effect. ) And a branch step-up notice effect (for example, in FIG. 71) for executing another notice effect (for example, the notice effect E or the notice effect G) different from the notice effect included in the normal step-up notice effect. The first branch step-up shown or the second branch step-up shown in FIGS. 72 and 73), and the notice effect execution means is the branch step up notice effect. Is executed, a predetermined notice effect (for example, the notice effect A or the notice effect B) in the normal step-up notice effect is executed in the middle of the execution of the predetermined notice effect (for example, the notice effect E or the notice effect G). (For example, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 101, the notice effect G in the second branch step-up is branched while the notice effect B in the main step-up is being executed. As shown in FIGS. 74 and 101, the notice effect E in the first branch step-up is branched from the notice effect A in synchronization with the timing of changing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up. However, you may be comprised so that it may branch in the middle of the notice effect A being performed. ).

  The step-up notice effect includes a special step-up notice effect (for example, the second step-up notice effect) different from the normal step-up notice effect and the branch step-up notice effect, and the notice effect executing means is usually used as the step-up notice effect. The step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect can be executed simultaneously in the same period during variable display (for example, in the example shown in FIG. 101, the first step is during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol and during the stop period of the effect symbol). The up-notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed, and the same applies to the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in the second and third embodiments. Good.

  The notice effect execution means executes control to change the aspect of the notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect in stages at different predetermined timings during variable display (for example, in FIG. 149). As shown, the timing of changing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B is different from the timing of changing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y, and the timing changing from the notice effect B to the notice effect C and the notice effect Y to the notice effect Z, The timing of changing to z is also different, as shown in FIGS.151 and 152, after the notice effect A of the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect X of the second step-up notice effect are started (9 -2) (9-3), change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the first step-up notice effect (9-4), then In the second step-up notice effect, the notice effect X is changed to the notice effect Y (9-5), and then the notice effect Y is changed to the notice effects Z, z (9-6) (9-7) ( 9-9) (9-12))).

  The notice effect execution means executes control for stepwise changing the aspect of the notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect at the same predetermined timing during variable display (for example, FIG. 126). In the example shown in Fig. 128, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are simultaneously executed at the same timing during the high-speed fluctuation period of the effect symbol. After the notice effect A of the first step up notice effect and the notice effect W of the second step up notice effect are started (1-2) (1-3), the notice of the first step up notice effect is given at the same timing T3. The production A changes from the announcement A to the announcement B, and changes from the announcement effect W of the second step-up announcement effect to the announcement effect X1 (1-4). After that, at the same timing T4, the notice effect B of the first step-up notice effect changes from the notice effect C to the notice effect C of the second step-up notice effect and changes to the notice effect Y1 (1-5). Thereafter, at the same timing T5, the notice effect C changes from the first step-up notice effect to the notice effect D and changes from the notice effect Y1 of the second step-up notice effect to the notice effect Z1 (1-6). It may be configured as follows.

  Reach determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the prior determination means The step of executing step S97 in 560) and the variation pattern type determination for determining the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on at least one of the determination result of the prior determination unit or the determination result of the reach determination unit The variation pattern for determining the variation pattern of the identification information from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the means (for example, the part for executing step S102 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the variation pattern type determination unit Determination means (for example, a game control micro computer And a performance operation executing means for executing a performance operation including the variable display of the identification information during the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination means. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may include a portion for executing steps S518 and S845 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the notice effect can be executed by changing the aspect of the effect step by step from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. The step-up notice effect includes a step-up notice effect having a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step until there are more stages than the result. A normal step-up notice effect capable of executing at least three stages of notice effects including two notice effects and a third notice effect, and a transition to the next notice effect in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect Including a branch step-up notice effect that executes a different system of notice effect different from the notice effect included in the normal step-up notice effect. Executing means, a game machine, characterized in that to start the announcement attraction of another system in the middle of the timing when a predetermined prediction effect is executed in the normal step-up announcement attraction when executing a branch step-up announcement attraction. According to such a gaming machine, since the step-up notice effect branches, the step-up notice effect can be provided with variations (diversity), and the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, the player not only expects to move to the next third notice effect during execution of the second notice effect in the main step-up notice effect, but also shifts to another system notice effect (branch) in the branch step-up. We can expect and can aim at improvement of further interest.

  In the second aspect of the invention, the step-up notice effect includes a special step-up notice effect different from the normal step-up notice effect and the branch step-up notice effect, and the notice effect execution means normally steps up as the step-up notice effect. Because it is configured to be able to execute the notice effect and the special step-up notice effect at the same time during the variable display, multiple step-up notice effects (normal step-up notice effect, special step-up notice effect) At the same time, you can improve your interest.

  In the invention described in claim 3, the notice effect executing means performs control to change the aspect of the notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect in stages at different predetermined timings during variable display. Since it is configured to execute, the timing of change of the notice effect in the plurality of step-up notice effects is different, and the player can play the game while confirming the plurality of notice effects and expecting the occurrence of a specific gaming state. And can further improve interest.

  In the invention described in claim 4, the notice effect execution means controls the step effect of the normal step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect in stages at the same predetermined timing during variable display. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the step (step) of the step-up notice effect of a plurality of systems.

  According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, reach determination means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the prior determination means. And a variation pattern type determination unit that determines the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on at least one of the determination result of the prior determination unit or the determination result of the reach determination unit, and the variation pattern type determination unit A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of identification information from among the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type, and the identification information during variable display of the identification information corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination means Production operation means for executing the production operation including variable display of the program, which increases the program capacity. Ku, it is possible to improve the interest of the game is running also various effect when not a reach state.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The circular display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the symbol display area, there are “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas (see symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in FIG. 129, etc.). The display screen of the device 9 may not be fixed, and the three areas of the symbol display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) , A state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start prizes are generated regardless of the prizes in the first start prize slot 13 and the second start prize slot 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes zero.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. In addition, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. A second decorative symbol display 9b is provided. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the jackpot on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 than the first starting winning port 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the 1st special symbol reservation memory display 18a and the 2nd special symbol reservation memory display 18b are provided, the total reservation memory display part 18c does not necessarily need to be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect design as the design of is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a displays variable display of the first decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when it is informed that it is a probable big hit or a probable promotion effect (a special effect indicating promotion to a probable state), the game state is shifted to a high probability state. At the same time, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution conditions for variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established). Transition. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the transition time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened. (In other words, the digestion of the stored memory becomes faster), and as a result, it is easier to start a winning and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short state and special symbol short state). Transition to a state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data according to a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, a changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation of the movable member. The example shown in FIG. 4 shows the operation of the movable member 78 when the re-change effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in the effect display device 9 is executed. In the re-change effect, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 4A (the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped) (FIG. 4). (Refer to (B) and (C)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols temporarily stop (see FIG. 4D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol re-varies (see FIG. 4E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol is finally stopped (confirmed). (See FIG. 4F). In the example shown in FIG. 4, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 4 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-changing effect ends, but when the re-changing effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM 55 is accessible. (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command (power failure restoration 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the random R value.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (minimum value that can be taken by random numbers) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S30). Specifically, payout control is performed in response to detection of a winning based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol fluctuation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol fluctuation speed every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  In this embodiment, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, the variable display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “big hit” There is a case where a specific effect for informing the player that there is a variable display mode of the effect symbol is executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, “expansion chance”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the “sliding” specific effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more effect symbol display areas ( For example, after the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “ 2 ”) in the effect symbol display area (for example, one or both of the“ left ”effect symbol display area 9L and the“ right ”effect symbol display area 9R). Thus, the effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. Here, the temporary stop display is the stop of the effect symbol that is performed before the fixed effect symbol is stopped and displayed (final stop display) because the variation time determined for each of a plurality of types of variation patterns to be described later has elapsed. Refers to the display. In the temporary stop display, while the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation variation display or immediately changing the effect symbol again only by a short stop. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the produced design symbol is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the effect symbol may be re-fluctuated after the effect symbol is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After changing the effect symbols in all the areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then all the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9C are displayed. , 9R can be effected a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of three times) for effect display to change the effect symbol again (pseudo continuous fluctuation). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7A in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and “middle symbol” is displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Intro”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all effect symbol display areas 9L, Before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed at 9C and 9R (final stop display), for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction portion of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  In the specific effect of “Development Opportunity”, the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are changed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then all effect symbol display areas are displayed. In 9L, 9C, and 9R, after the effect symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the effect symbols as the reach state. The As an example, in the specific development of “Development Chance”, the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. For this reason, any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the variable display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The player's expectation is enhanced.

  In the specific effect of “end of development chance”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all effect symbols are displayed. In the areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, an effect display is performed in which an effect symbol of a predetermined combination as a development opportunity is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the effect symbol, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying a display pattern other than the variable display mode of the effect symbol, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, a notice effect such as “step-up notice” and “mail display” is set to be executable.

  In the “step-up notice” notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbols are displayed. Before the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area, an effect display for switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order may be performed in the display area of the effect display device 9. . In the notice effect of “step-up notice”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the “mail display” notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbols are displayed. Before the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the area, the effect operation changes such as changing the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player. An effect display is performed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display of the production symbol is started, the variable display state of the production symbol does not become the reach state, but the predetermined design. There is a case where the confirmed effect symbol that becomes one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable symbol display state has reached the reach state after the variable symbol symbol display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that becomes a 15-round big hit symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the variable display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state After the reach effect is executed, the determined effect symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed effect symbol which is a normal big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of the “left”, “middle” and “right” in the effect display device 9. Among the production symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the production symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in each of the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In this way, the effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the variable symbol display mode of the effect symbol in which the confirmed bonus symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is This is referred to as “normal” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the time reduction state or the normal state. Become.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variable big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15-round big-hit symbol, the production symbol is displayed in correspondence with the variable display state becoming the reach state. After the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the symbol is “normal” is executed, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed effect symbol which is a probable big hit combination is, for example, the symbol number variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of the “left”, “middle” and “right” in the effect display device 9. Among the production symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the production symbols having the odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The effect symbols whose odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are called probability variation symbols. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, after the reach production similar to the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, the probable big jackpot combination is decided. The variable display mode of the production symbol in which the production symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a variable display mode of “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state. .

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variable big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15-round big-hit symbol, the variable display state of the production symbol is variable corresponding to the reach state. After a reach effect that is different from the case where the display mode is “normal” is executed, a confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach production different from the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the production symbol in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second positive change”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the variable change state is controlled to the positive change state. .

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variable big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15-round big-hit symbol, the production symbol is displayed in correspondence with the variable display state being reached. After the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the symbol is “normal” is executed, the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach production similar to the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the production symbol in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “third probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the probability changed state. .

  As described above, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the confirmed effect symbol that is a probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed by variable display of the effect symbol. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “third probability variation”, the final effect that is a normal jackpot combination in the variable display of the effect symbol is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable display result of the effect symbol. In other words, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  In the special figure game, if the probability variable big win symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the production symbol is changed to the reach state. After the reach effect and the roulette chance effect are executed, the predetermined effect pattern that is the predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped or displayed, or after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the predetermined non-reach combination May be displayed in a stopped state, or the variable display state of the effect symbol may not be in a reach state, and various confirmed effect symbols may be displayed in a stopped state. Note that the chances of success TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4 may be determined in advance as combinations of effect symbols included in the special combination. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. The variable display mode of the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “fourth probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “fourth probability change”, it is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15th round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled. Will be.

  When the special symbol indicating the number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the production symbol corresponds to the reach state. After the “normal” reach effect is executed, or after the “normal” reach effect and roulette chance effect are executed, the fixed effect symbol that is the predetermined reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, After the specific effect is executed, or the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, the fixed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the variable display state of the effect symbol Is not reached, and the finalized design symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7 determined performance symbol to be one of 突確 chance th TC1~TC4 shown in (C) may appear stopped. Note that the chances of success TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4 may be determined in advance as combinations of effect symbols included in the special combination. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is the two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the effect symbol in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled.

  As described above, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “fourth probability variation”, the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. After a “normal” reach effect and a roulette chance effect are executed, a confirmed effect pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and after a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, a predetermined non-reach combination is confirmed. The effect design may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “accuracy”, the definite effect symbol that is one of the accuracy chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed, and the “normal” reach effect and the roulette chance effect are executed. In some cases, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and after a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, a fixed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. For this reason, when a fixed effect symbol that is one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in a variable display of the effect symbol, or after a “normal” reach effect and a roulette chance effect are executed, a predetermined reach lose combination If the confirmed effect design that becomes a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the game is controlled to the sudden appearance 15 round big hit state. The player cannot recognize from the variable display result of the effect design whether it is controlled to the big hit state of 2 rounds.

  Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “accuracy” and “fourth probability change”. . In other words, when the finalized design symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the production symbol, the variable display result is “ It will be decided that it will be a big hit.

  When the variable display mode of the effect symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, during the variable display of the effect symbol, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, the effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the effect display device 9. After that, for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are changed again in a state where the same effect symbols are aligned, and an effect symbol that becomes a probable big hit combination, Any of the effect symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the effect symbol again, a change promotion promotion effect during change is performed in which the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display effect design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After the change is made, a successful promotion effect during change is performed in which the confirmed effect symbol that is a promising big hit combination is stopped and displayed.

  When the variable display result of the variable display result is “big hit”, if the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds of big hit status After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the final round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the effect symbol after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed effect symbol is usually a jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion success effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette in the jackpot promotion failure production is displayed in the “even number” and displays the production image of “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production is thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion to be in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol indicating the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the variation of the effect symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7, non-reach PB1- 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-10, super PB3-1 to super PB3- 6. Variation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory view exemplifying a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, super PA4-1 to super PA4 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit”. -10, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-5, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-5, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-5, Super PC4-1 and Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1 -2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-6, Special PG2-1, Special PG2-2, Special PG3-1 to Special PG3 -3, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, special PH3-1 to special PH3-3 variation patterns are available .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 103 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of effect symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 11 is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 11 is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. The numerical values described in FIG. 11 are jackpot determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). If it matches the big hit judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit or sudden big hit) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 11 indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type determination table 131 sets the variable symbol display mode of the effect symbol as “normal” and “first probability change” based on the random number value for determining the big hit type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “fourth probability variation” and “surprise accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 23 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number value for determining the big hit type is composed of determination data assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. Further, the jackpot type determination table 131 uses the jackpot type buffer value (hit type buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 23 as the jackpot type determined based on the random number value for determining the jackpot type. Table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “00” to “05” corresponding to the type may be included.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 12, depending on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the big hits of “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability” The assignment of the random value for determining the jackpot type to the type is different. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, “82” is assigned to the big hit type of “fourth probable change” among the random values for jackpot type determination, and “83” to “100”. When the value of the range is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, and when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the jackpot type for the “fourth odds” and “surprise” jackpot types A random number for judgment is not assigned. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “fourth probability variation” or “surprising accuracy” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to (G) and FIGS. 14 (A) to (E). When the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” is made, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M change the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the big hit type for the variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M corresponds to, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on the determination result of the jackpot type and the total number of reserved storage, it is selected as a use table. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. The random number MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1 to special CA4-3, special CA5-1, special CA5. -2, decision data to be assigned to any of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CB5-1, special CC4-1 to special CC4-3, special CC5-1, special CC5-2, etc. It is composed of

  Here, as an example, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the jackpot shown in FIG. 13A used when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. The variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132B for use of the big hit shown in FIG. 13B used when the big hit type is “first probability change” include normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is selected. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. Thus, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit selected in accordance with the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132E (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132F to 132J (selected in the probable variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132D, 132K, 132M (short-time state) (When selected) are compared with each other, the allocation of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type, and also varies for different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. A random value MR3 for pattern type determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132I and 132K used when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, for example, special CA5-1, special CA5-2, special CB5-1, special CC5-1. When the jackpot type is other than “fourth probable variation”, such as special CC5-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. Is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability change”, when controlling to the 15 round big hit state, the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of controlling to the state.

  In the setting of the variation pattern type determination table 132D for big hits used when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the variation corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4” Corresponding to the case where all of the random numbers MR3 for pattern type determination are assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA5-1, while the total number of reserved storages is any one of “5” to “8”. All of the random number values MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CA5-2. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). If there is, the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-1 is determined. On the other hand, if the total number of reserved storage is a predetermined number or more, the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-2 is determined.

  Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I, even when the total number of reserved storages is “0” to “8”, the variation pattern type of the special CB5-1 is changed to the variation pattern type determination variation. All of the numerical values MR3 are assigned. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probable change”, the total number of stored memory is any of “0” to “8”. Even if it exists, the variation pattern type of special CB5-1 is determined.

  Then, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132K, all of the random numbers MR3 for variation pattern type determination correspond to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. While allotted to the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1, the random number MR 3 for variation pattern type determination is all corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”. Is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC5-2. For this reason, when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). If there is, the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1 is determined. On the other hand, if the total reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-2 is determined.

  Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E used when the big hit type is “surprise”, the fluctuation corresponds to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. Among the random values MR3 for pattern type determination, values in the range of “1” to “200” are assigned to the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, while values in the range of “201” to “241”. Is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-2. On the other hand, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is in the range of “1” to “180”. While the value is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-1, the value in the range of “181” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-3. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). On the other hand, if one of the variation pattern types of special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is determined, and the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the variation pattern of either special CA4-1 or special CA4-3 The type will be determined. In addition, with such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of special CA4-1 is smaller than when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Lower.

  Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132J used when the big hit type is “surprise”, even if the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “8”, the fluctuation pattern type determination Among the random numbers MR3 for use, values in the range of “1” to “150” are assigned to the variation pattern types of the special CB4-1, while values in the range of “151” to “241” are the special CB4. -2 variation pattern type. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probable change state, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the total number of reserved storage is any of “0” to “8”. Also, the variation pattern type of either the special CB4-1 or the special CB4-2 is determined.

  Then, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132M, in response to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”, among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, “ The value in the range of “1” to “175” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1, while the value in the range of “176” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC4-2. ing. On the other hand, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is in the range of “1” to “150”. While the value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1, the value in the range of “151” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-3. For this reason, when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). On the other hand, if any of the variation patterns of the special CC 4-1 and the special CC 4-2 is determined, and the total number of reserved storage is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern of either the special CC 4-1 or the special CC 4-3 The type will be determined. In addition, with such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1 is smaller than when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Lower.

  As another example, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132J, and 132M used when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2 , Special CA4-3, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, special CC4-2, special CC4-3, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is other than "surprise" In this case, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the control is made to the two round big hit state, the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state or the sudden appearance fake 15 round big hit state, Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 13 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132F for jackpot shown in FIG. 13 (F) used when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the variation pattern of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. In this way, paying attention to the case where the jackpot type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, 132F (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, 132G (selected when “first probability variation”) , Jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C, 132H (selected when “second probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132I (selected when “fourth probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type When the decision tables 132E, 132J, and 132M (selected when “probable”) are compared with each other, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state and the time The allocation of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different depending on whether the state is the state or the probability variation state, and the variation pattern is different for the variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. A random number MR3 for type determination may be assigned. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing” based on the random number value for reach determination. This table is referred to for determination. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C represent reach determination random numbers as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1. Determination data assigned to any one of the determination results indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1, etc. It is composed of

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15 (A), “1” to “204” among the random numbers for reach determination, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to a determination result of reach HA 2-1 while a value in the range of “2” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA 1-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Furthermore, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than the number of random values assigned to non-reach HA1-1 and non-reach HA1-2. A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-3. Corresponding to each of the cases where the total number of reserved storages is “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”, non-reach among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each of the determination results of HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-3, is determined as a determination result of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Assign to. With this setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbols is the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type determination table for reach 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, “1” to “1” of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. Further, according to the determination result of reach HA2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that the random number value for the reach determination is assigned in accordance with the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. Yes. As the determination result of the reach HA 2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” or “2”. The determination result of reach HA2-3 indicates that the total pending storage number is either “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3 and determination data to be assigned to any of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM include hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D shown in FIGS. 18, 19A and 19B, and FIG. When the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D determine that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern is determined for the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR4. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern types are special CA4-1 to special CA4-3, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2 and the special CC4-1 to the special CC4-3 is used, and the variation pattern type is the special CA5-1 or the special CA5-. 2, Special CB5-1, Special CC5-1, Special CC5-2 Per variation pattern determination table 137D according to the determination result to the effect that is selected as the usage table. Each of the winning variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit”. It consists of decision data to be assigned to either.

  Here, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 18, "normal" reach effects such as normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 are provided corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern to be executed. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of super CA 3-2, the change pattern for executing reach effect α1 such as super PA4-1 to super PA4-5 and the reach effect such as super PA4-6 to super PA4-10. A random value MR for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the variation pattern types of Super CA3-3 and Super CA3-4, reach effects β1 such as Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-5, Super PC4-1, Super PD1-1, Super PD1-2 are provided. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern to be executed. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA 3-5, random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing reach effect α3 such as super PA5-1 to super PA5-5. Yes. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-6, the variation pattern is changed to the variation pattern that executes the effect of determining the probability variation big hit such as Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-5, Super PE1-1, Super PE1-2. A random number value MR4 for determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-7, a random number value for variation pattern determination is added to a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “Development Chance” such as Super PC 4-1 and Super PC 4-2. MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-8, the variation pattern changes to a variation pattern that executes a reach effect β3 such as PF1-1 or a variation pattern that executes a roulette chance effect such as PF1-2 or PF1-3. A random number MR4 for pattern determination is assigned.

  Further, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137B shown in FIG. 19A, the reach effect β1 such as the super PB4-1 to the super PB4-5 is executed corresponding to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CB3-1. The random pattern MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to the fluctuation pattern to be changed. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-2, the variation pattern determining random number value for executing the reach effect β1 and the roulette effect such as the super PD 1-1 and the super PD 1-2. MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-3, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern that executes the reach effect β2 such as the super PB5-1 to the super PB5-5. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-4, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern such as the super PC 4-1 and the super PC 4-2. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-5, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β2 and the roulette effect such as the super PE1-1 and the super PE1-2. Assigned.

  With such setting, for example, with reference to the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, whether the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1 or other variation pattern types. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the “normal” reach effect. When the variation pattern type of the normal CA 3-1 is determined, one of the variation patterns of the normal PA 2-5 to the normal PA 2-8 is referred to with reference to the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect of “slip”.

  When the variation pattern type other than the normal CA 3-1 is determined, for example, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2 is referred to, the super PA 4-1 to the super PA 4-1 are referred to with reference to the hit variation pattern determination table 137 A shown in FIG. By determining one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA 4-10, whether to execute a specific effect, whether to execute a specific effect of “slip”, “pseudo train”, or “intro”, for example, It is possible to determine the type of the specific effect such as the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo ream” and to stop the display of the effect symbol that is a big hit combination in the first stage effect display (temporary stop The reach effect α1 in which the effect symbol to be displayed is also executed is executed, or the effect symbol that is a big hit combination in the effect display of the second stage is stopped and displayed Can performance symbol to temporary stop including display) by the determines whether to perform the reach demonstration α2 appearing.

  However, when the jackpot type is “second probability change”, for example, a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed in order to cause a certain probability change jackpot effect to appear at a certain rate regardless of the type of reach effect. Variation pattern types (for example, variation pattern types of super CA 3-7 and super CB 3-4) are provided.

  In the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 19B, special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG2 corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is special CA4-1. The random pattern value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern such as −1 and special PG2-2. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA4-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all revariable display operations such as special PG1-3 are performed twice, or special PG1- 4, a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as 4 are performed, a variation pattern that stops and displays an effect symbol that is one of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4, such as special PG3-1, etc. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that is used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. On the other hand, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA 4-3, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as special PG 1-5 are performed, Fluctuations that are used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, such as a fluctuation pattern that stops and displays an effect symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1 A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern such as the special PG2-1. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB4-2, the roulette chance effect for selecting the effect that develops later, such as the special PG3-2 and the special PG3-3, is executed and developed. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for selecting the surprise effect as an effect. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1, the variation pattern determination is performed on the variation patterns such as the special PG 1-1, the special PG 1-2, the special PG 1-6, the special PG 2-1, and the special PG 2-2. Is assigned a random value MR4. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC4-2, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all revariable display operations such as the special PG1-3 are performed twice, a special PG1-4, etc. Variable such as a fluctuation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-ream” in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times, and a fluctuation pattern for stopping and displaying an effect symbol that is one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that is used only when the display result is “big hit” and the type of big hit is “surprise”. On the other hand, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-3, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as the special PG 1-5 are performed, Fluctuations that are used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, such as a fluctuation pattern that stops and displays an effect symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1 A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern.

  Further, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. 20, the “pseudo-continuous display operation” in which the total re-change display operation such as the special PH1-3 is performed twice corresponding to the case of the special CA5-1 fluctuation pattern type. "A variation pattern that executes a specific effect", a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of "pseudo-ream" in which all re-variable display operations such as special PH1-4 are performed three times, and a random chance TC1 to TC4 such as a special PH3-1 A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for stopping and displaying any of the effect symbols. On the other hand, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA5-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as special PH1-5 are performed, A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol which is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 such as the special PH 3-1. In addition, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB5-1, a roulette chance effect such as a special PH 3-2 and a special PH 3-3 for selecting an effect that develops later from a plurality of types is executed, A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for selecting a surprise effect as an effect to be developed. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1 is selected, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which the entire re-variable display operation such as the special PH1-3 is performed twice, or a special PH1-4 Fluctuating to a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-ream” in which all re-variable display operations are performed three times, or a variation pattern that stops and displays any of the stunning chance items TC1 to TC4 such as special PH3-1 A random number MR4 for pattern determination is assigned. On the other hand, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as the special PH 1-5 are performed, A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol which is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 such as the special PH 3-1.

  Here, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the variation pattern type is determined from the gaming state and the total number of reserved storage. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the ratio that varies depending on the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories by assigning the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type Thus, one of a plurality of variation pattern types used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” is determined. Here, in the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, roulette chance effect, Any of the effects developed from the temporary stop display of the effect symbol that is one of the chances TC1 to TC4 is executed.

  With such setting, for example, referring to the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132E, and 132I to 132M shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, after determining the variation pattern type corresponding to the total number of reserved storage, FIG. With reference to the hit variation pattern determination tables 137C and 137D shown in (B), by determining the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and to store the total hold Corresponding to the number, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation can be determined. That is, in the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”, when it is determined to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the total number of re-variable display operations is executed twice and three times. One of the times is determined. On the other hand, when the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8” and the execution of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is determined, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation is 1 Times are determined.

  Here, the appearance of the fluctuation pattern determined with reference to the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 19B and the fluctuation pattern determined with reference to the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. The production operations having the same production mode are executed. That is, the variation pattern of the special PHl-3 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PGl-3. Specifically, after the total re-variation display operation is executed twice, the effect design that becomes a non-reach combination is temporarily stopped. Display, and then start a stunning presentation. The variation pattern of special PHl-4 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of special PG1-4. Specifically, after the total re-variation display operation is executed three times, an effect design that becomes a non-reach combination is displayed temporarily. Then, the stunning production is started. The variation pattern of special PH1-5 is the same as the variation pattern of special PG1-5. Specifically, after the re-variation display operation is executed once, the effect design that becomes a non-reach combination is displayed temporarily. Then, the stunning production is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-1 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-1, and specifically, an effect design that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variation display. Is temporarily stopped, and then a stunning effect is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-2 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-2. Specifically, after the start of the variation display, the specific representation is not executed and the reach state is reached. A roulette chance effect that is selected from a plurality of types is executed, an astonishing effect is selected as an effect that develops, and then the astonishing effect is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-3 is the same as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-3. Specifically, the variation state of the special PH 3-3 is reached after a specific effect of “slip” is executed after the start of the variation display, and then developed. A roulette chance effect for selecting an effect to be performed from among a plurality of types is executed, an astonishing effect is selected as an effect that develops, and then the astonishing effect is started.

  Further, in FIG. 19B, setting of the variation pattern type used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” in the hit variation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. In the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown, the range of the random value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern assigned to the fluctuation pattern in which the visual effect mode performs the same effect operation is the same. That is, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137C, the special hit CA4 is selected when the big hit type is determined as “surprise” during the normal state and the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of -2, among the variation pattern determination random value MR4, a value in the range of "1" to "45" is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PGl-3, and "46" to "101" ”Is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-4, and values in the range of“ 102 ”to“ 251 ”are assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG3-1. On the other hand, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137D, when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probable change” during the normal state, and the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of the selected special CA5-1, a special value in which the value in the range of “1” to “45” of the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination has a variation mode similar to that of the special PG1-3. A value in the range of “46” to “101” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PH1-4 that has the same fluctuation pattern as that of the special PG1-4. Is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG 3-1 having the same variation mode as that of the special PG 3-1.

  In addition, special CA4-3 and special CA5-2 variation pattern types (both variation patterns selected in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”), special Fluctuation pattern types of CB4-2 and special CB5-1 (variation pattern types that can be selected when both are in the probabilistic state), special CC4-2 and special CC5-1 (both in the short-time state, the total number of reserved memories is “0”) -Variation pattern type selected when any of "4"), special CC4-3 and special CC5-2 variation pattern types (both in short time state, the total number of pending storage is "5"-"8") The variation pattern type random number MR4 assigned to the variation pattern having the same variation mode is the same for the variation pattern type selected when the variation pattern type is any one of the above. That. Thereby, for example, the player is a big hit because of the difference in the variation mode such as whether the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo train” is 0, 2 or 3 times. It becomes difficult to predict whether the type is “surprise accuracy” or “fourth probability variation”, and it is possible to make the player feel more surprising for the fact that the suddenness fake 15 round big hit state.

  It should be noted that it may be set so as not to cause the player to predict whether the jackpot type is “surprise” or “fourth probability variation” due to the difference in variation mode. If the ratio determined for each variation pattern is set to be substantially the same, the range of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern need not be completely the same. As an example, when the jackpot type is determined as “surprise”, it is determined as one variation pattern type regardless of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and used when the jackpot type is “surprise”. The variation patterns (for example, special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PG3-) are the same as the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined as “fourth probability variation” among the variation pattern types 1) and a variation pattern (for example, special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG1-6) PG2-1, special PG2-2), and the determination rate of each variation pattern that becomes the variation mode similar to the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” is the big hit type There may be set such that substantially the same as the determined rate of each change pattern of the fluctuation pattern type (e.g., special CA5-1) to be used when it is determined that "fourth probability variation". Specifically, corresponding to the variation pattern type of special CA4-2, a value in the range of “1” to “22” is allocated to the variation pattern of special PG1-1 in the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. , A value in the range of “23” to “50” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-2, a value in the range of “50” to “67” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-6, and “68”. A value in the range of “79” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG2-1, a value in the range of “80” to “125” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG2-2, and “126” to “147”. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3, the value of the range of "148" to "175" is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-4, and the value of the range of "176" to "251" Is special PG3- It is assumed to be set as assigned to the variation pattern. In the case of such a setting, each variation pattern (for example, special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PG3) having a variation mode similar to the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation”. -1), the ratio determined for special PG1-3 is about 17%, the ratio determined for special PG1-4 is about 22%, and the ratio determined for special PG3-1 is about 60%. . On the other hand, corresponding to the variation pattern type of special CA5-1, a value in the range of “1” to “45” among the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern of special PH1-3. , Values in the range of “46” to “101” are assigned to the variation pattern of the special PH1-4, and values in the range of “102” to “251” are assigned to the variation pattern of the special PH3-1. With such a setting, the ratio determined for the special PH1-3 having the same variation mode as that of the special PG1-3 among the variation patterns when the big hit type is determined to be "fourth probability variation". Is about 18%, and the ratio determined for the special PH1-4, which is the same as the special PG1-4, is about 22%. The ratio determined to 1 is about 60%. As described above, the variation pattern type used when the big hit type is “surprising” and the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-1 are the special PG 1-3, the special PG 1-4, and the special PG 3-1, respectively. Although the range of the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern assigned to each of the special PH1-3, the special PH1-4, and the special PH3-1 is different, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is allocated. The ratio is almost the same. Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to predict whether the jackpot type is “surprise” or “fourth likelihood” due to the difference in the variation mode, and therefore, the player is in a stunned fifteen round jackpot state. This can make you feel more surprising.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes the loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. When it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the variable display result of the effect symbol is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, according to the variation pattern type. It consists of decision data assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 21, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” among the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is “end of development chance eyes” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variable display result of the effect symbol is “lost” and the determination that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and execute an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, in the variation pattern type determination table 136A for non-reach shown in FIG. 17A, among the random value MR3 for determination of variation pattern type, non-reach HA1- A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, for the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, the reach determination disturbance corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3 to which a value in the range is assigned, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “2”, and the reach determination random number MR2-2 Among these, values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, “1” in the reach determination random number MR2-2 corresponding to the total reserved storage numbers “3” and “4”. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total stored memory number corresponds to “5” to “8” and “1” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range of “30” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Become. When the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4”, or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0” or “1 or“ 2 ”. Compared with the case where it is, the ratio determined to the variation pattern classification of non-reach CA1-4 becomes low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect of “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the losing fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 22, the fluctuation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA2-1. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-9, Super PA 3-10, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 3-5, for example. With regard to the variation pattern, the variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state after the pseudo continuous variation has been performed. That is, since the variation patterns of super PA 3-4 and super PA 3-5 are variation patterns for executing reach effect α1, the variation pattern type of super CA 2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Corresponding to this case, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of Super PA 3-9 and Super PA 3-10 is a variation pattern for executing reach effect α2, it corresponds to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation patterns of the super PB 3-4 and the super PB 3-5 are variation patterns for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern types of the super CA 2-3 and the super CB 2-1 are used in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. Corresponding to the case, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA 2-1 and super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. Further, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. ing. For the variation pattern type of the super CB 2-1, the random value MR 3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135 B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the effect symbol being in the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  As described above, the determination of the variation pattern is performed in two stages, such as the determination of the variation pattern type, and the reach effect is determined by being included in the first variation pattern type. Even when performing various effects other than effects, when changing the appearance rate of a specific reach effect at the development stage, it is only necessary to change the distribution of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and it is easy to develop. Become.

  Further, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 18, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-2, the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination has a range of “1” to “3”. The value is assigned to the variation pattern of Super PA4-1 that does not execute the specific effect. Among the random numbers MR4 for determining the variation pattern, values in the range of “4” to “11” are assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-2 that executes the specific effect of “slip”. The value in the range of “21” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro”. Among the random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the value in the range of “22” to “34” is the variation pattern of the super PA 4-4 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariable display operation is performed twice. The value in the range of “35” to “52” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times. . On the other hand, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 22, “1” to “66” among the random values MR4 for variation pattern determination corresponding to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-2. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-1 that does not execute the specific effect. Of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, values in the range of “67” to “120” are assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-2 that executes the specific effect of “slip”. The value in the range of “161” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro”. Among the random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the value in the range of “162” to “193” is the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariation display operation is performed twice. And a value in the range of “194” to “203” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times. .

  As described above, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-1 that does not execute the specific effect is the super PA 4-2 to the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect. The ratio is determined to be lower than any of the fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-1 that does not execute the specific effect is the super PA 3-2 to the super PA 3-3 that executes the specific effect. It is higher than the ratio determined by any one of the five fluctuation patterns. With this setting, when the reach effect α1 is executed, the reliability when the specific effect is executed is more reliable than the case where the specific effect is not executed (the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit”). Can be high.

When the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro” is the super PA 4− that executes the specific effect of “slip”. It is higher than the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of 2. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation twice is the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of the “intro”. It is higher than the determined rate. The rate determined for the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation three times is higher than the rate determined for the all-revariable display. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes “intro” is the super PA 3- that executes the specific effect of “slip”. It is lower than the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of 2. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation twice is determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes the “intro”. It is lower than the rate. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-variable display operation three times is the ratio that is determined for the specific effect of “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-variable display operation twice. It is lower than the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 to be executed. With this setting, the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is greater when the “Intro” specific effect is executed than when the “Slip” specific effect is executed. In addition, the reliability can be increased when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed rather than when the “intro” specific effect is executed.

  Furthermore, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the total re-variable display operation is performed twice. While the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of the Super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the re-variable display operation three times is higher, the variable display result is “lost” In this case, the “pseudo-continuous display operation” is performed three times more than the ratio determined in the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” performing the total re-variable display operation twice. The ratio determined as the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the specific effect “is lower. With such a setting, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, it is more reliable when the total re-variable display operation is performed three times than when the total re-variable display operation is performed twice. The degree (possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”) can be increased.

  Incidentally, in correspondence with the type of reach effect, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect, the type of the specific effect, and the number of executions of the total variation display operation in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By setting different values, the reliability with which a specific reach effect is executed varies depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed, the type of the specific effect, and the number of executions of the total variation display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”. It may be allowed.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 560, for example, a game control data holding area as shown in FIG. 23 is used as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 23 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition according to the winning in association with the holding number in the order of winning in the first starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number value or the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value is set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the game (the special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second start condition according to the winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the second start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number value or the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value is set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening, or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, a big hit start flag, and the like.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 31 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as the start time of the big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure fluctuation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal map change timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the general game, such as the normal map change time which is the execution time of the normal game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, a winning number counter, and the like. .

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 503, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, numerical data indicating various random values (random 2-1, 2-2, 3, 4, 5, 6) are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and the CPU 103 As the software is executed, numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The winning number counter is for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening. For example, data indicating a count initial value “0” is set in the winning number counter as the winning number count value every time the round starts. Each time a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning number count value is incremented by one and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area in which setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” corresponding to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 8a. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  In the big hit type buffer, the variable display mode of the effect symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of big hit types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, “surprise probability”. The buffer value corresponding to the determination result of which to be determined is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 12, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (hit type buffer value) is set to “00” and the jackpot type When the type is “first probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “02” and the big hit type is In the case of “third probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “03”, and in the case of the big hit type “fourth probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “04”. ", The big hit type buffer value is set to" 05 ".

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the production control device 100 controls the first design symbol display unit 9a or the second design design display unit 9b to start the design design variable display. In step 9, control is performed so as to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of effect symbols (and decoration symbols) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the jackpot game (a jackpot start designation command, a fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a sudden start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). The command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a promising big hit (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (surprise end specification command: ending 3 specification command) that specifies the end of a game of sudden probability change.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that the first starting prize has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there has been a second start winning. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be designated by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 24, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the variable pattern command and the display result specifying command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the design symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display. The image display device 9 that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces the effect according to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are the first special symbol display 8a by the effect control microcomputer 100. Whether or not the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the symbol is changed by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start winning port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of a special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total reserved storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbols and decoration symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning opening 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 27A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is determined. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 27B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 extracts a value from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S215). . In the process of step S215, random R (big hit determination random number) and software random number 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command (step S216). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S218). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start winning designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S225). Note that, in the process of step S225, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command (step S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a total pending storage number designation command based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S228). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the second start winning designation command.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of step S213-218 and the process of step S223-228 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, the data indicating “second” is set, and the common storage routine selects the reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number buffer or second reserved memory number buffer) according to the set data. Or a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) is selected.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 27A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first 1 "is set (step S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 11) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 is set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). . When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, set in the process of ending the big hit game, determined to be a normal big hit, and reset in the process of ending the big hit game.

  When the value of the random R does not match any of the big hit determination values, the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 12 is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Types (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation” corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2-1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area ”,“ Fourth Probability ”or“ Sudden Accuracy ”) is determined as the jackpot type (step S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “00” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, “03” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “surprise”, “05” is set as the data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is the two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91).

  When the jackpot flag is set, the table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is used as the table according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the change pattern type determination tables for use 132A to 132M is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the big hit flag is not set, based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the effect symbol according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used for determining whether or not the variable display state is the reach state (step S95). Further, the random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 2-2 (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the data indicating presence / absence, whether or not to reach, the type of effect when not reaching or the type of reach when reaching is determined (step S97). Note that the value before decremented by -1 in the process of step S53 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of step S97.

  If it is decided to reach, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1 or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of step S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types (step S99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in step S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1- 1 or non-reach HC1-2), one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (Step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  In step S <b> 101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Then, based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S99 or S100 (step S102). .

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the determination tables 138A and 138B is selected (step S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (step S104). Then, based on the extracted random 4 value, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103 (step S105).

  Next, control is performed to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S107). For example, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs a control to transmit an effect control command (see FIG. 24) of one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 7 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type and deviation. This is performed (step S111).

  Then, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number is transmitted (step S112). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result specifying command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S113).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S126), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Then, a control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S139 (step S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S134), and performs control to send a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is suddenly a probable big hit, a sudden start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of normal big hit and probability variation big hit (15 round big hit), 2 times in case of sudden hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step). S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S138).

  In step S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (step S140). If the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S142). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S143).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S305). In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer by -1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 controls to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S404) and decrements the value of the number-of-opening counter (step S405).

  Further, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the big prize opening can be opened in each round is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S406). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S415).

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the special prize opening process during the special symbol process (step S306). In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (step S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by 1 (step S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the big prize opening (step). S435). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (step S438). When the value of the number-of-opens counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the big prize opening The value is updated according to the pre-release process (step S305) (step S441). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of a sudden probability big hit, it may be shorter than the 15R big hit.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit end time (time for notifying the end of the big hit game, for example, in the effect display device 9) in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (Step S307) (Step S443).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). Here, if it is a probable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent, if it is suddenly a probable big hit, a sudden end designation command is sent, and if it is none, a big hit end 1 designation command is sent. To do. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. Note that the process of step S152 may be executed before step S442 in the special winning opening opening process.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S158).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state (step S161). Then, the process proceeds to step S162. If neither the probability variation big hit nor sudden probability variation big hit is found, the time reduction flag is set (step S162), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction number counter (step S163). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S164).

  Next, specific examples of effects executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 38 to 41, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. That is, in FIGS. 38 to 41, a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG. Further, the characters as the production information attached to the production symbols are also omitted. FIG. 38 shows an effect produced by the control of the microcomputer 100 for effect control when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, and when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display device 9. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect is not executed as shown in FIGS. 38 (C1) and (C2). When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 38 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 38D1 to 38D6 is executed. 38 (D1) to 38 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38A, for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, corresponding to the determination that the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, FIG. The stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. If the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1. Then (see FIG. 52), the “slip” specific effect is executed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Therefore, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. When a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, when an effect symbol of “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, an effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Done.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 38 (C2), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (D2), by stopping the display of the “6” effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a fluctuation change display of the effect symbols is performed, and then the effect symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 38 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (D4) to (D6), the effect symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol which is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in FIG. 38 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is obtained in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (see FIG. 38). 47x). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display).

  39 to 41 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. In all, the change of the production design is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  And, for example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 39 (C1) to (C3), “Left” and After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R and then stopped and displayed. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so as to reach the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, as shown in FIGS. 39D1 to 39D, all symbols are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous change) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. After that, the effect symbols “6” in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the effect symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 39 (C3) and FIG. 39 (D5), as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, as shown in FIG. 40B, the number “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is “ A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “out”. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (H), after displaying an effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach out of the reach combination by stopping and displaying the effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping the effect symbol number “5” in the symbol display area 9C. It is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the, and end the variable display of the effect symbols. When the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3, the reach effect β1, and the reach effect β2 are executed, as shown in FIG. The speed increases again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 40D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 40 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 40 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 40 (G), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 40G, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result becomes “out”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the reach-rejected combination and end the variable display of the effect symbols. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 40 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. Further, in the reach effect β2, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 40 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 40 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporary stop display). The directed design appears. When the variable display result is “out of line”, the displayed effect symbol is not changed, the effect symbols constituting the reach-out combination are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbol variable display is ended. In the reach effect α3, for example, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the third stage effect display in the reach effect α3 is not shown in FIGS.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the effect control process of steps S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number used for determining a production mode or the like is executed (step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command reception buffer, for example, a command reception buffer in a ring buffer format capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 24) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The displayed display result specifying command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S624). If the received effect control command is a surprise start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a surprise start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  Further, if the received production control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S642). If the received effect control command is a surprise end designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a sudden end specification command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S646). If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S647), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S649). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 45, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is lit as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 45A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 45B).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 46, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, and the temporary stop symbols for determining the promotion effect. A random number SR2, a random number SR3 for determining a temporary stop symbol at the time of a slip / development chance, a random number SR4-1 for determining a first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, a random number SR4-2 for determining a second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, Random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo temporary stop symbol, random number SR5 for determining promotion effect execution, random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern, random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern , Random number SR7 for determining notice type, random number SR8-1 for determining first step-up notice, random number SR8-2 for determining second step-up notice, random number SR8-3 for determining step-up notice of movable object, mail notice Random number SR8-4, random number SR8-5 for determining card advance notice, random number SR8-6 for determining advance notice of frame, random number SR8-7 for determining advance notice of effect blades, random number SR8 for determining notice of other system liquid crystal -8, random number SR9-1 for determining the first mini character notice, random number SR9-2 for determining the second mini character notice, random number SR9-3 for determining the third mini character notice, random number SR9-4 for determining the fourth mini character notice The random number SR9-5 for determining the fifth mini character notice and the random number SR9-6 for determining the sixth mini character notice are used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the effect.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the effect display device 9 as finalized effect symbols that are variable display results of the effect symbols. , Random numbers used to determine the effect symbols (final stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the variable display of the effect symbol ends. These are the three production symbols. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance is “left”, “medium”, when executing the specific effect of “slip” or when executing the specific effect of “developed chance”, This is a random value used for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and values in the range of “1” to “101”. Take.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “fourth probability change”, the random effect value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination Or a random number value used for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random numbers SR6-1 and SR6-3 for determining the first and third specific effect patterns include a plurality of specific effect patterns corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip” and “intro”. A random value used to determine one of the types. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern in the case of executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice type includes a plurality of kinds of notices (“No notice”, “First step up notice effect”, “Email notice effect”, “Card notice effect”, “Step up moving object” shown in FIG. 79). Random number used to determine which type of notice is to be executed among “notice effect” and “other system liquid crystal notice effect”). The random number SR7 for determining the notice type takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”.

  Random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect. The random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “500”. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect form) of the second step-up notice effect. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “600”. The movable object step-up notice determination random number SR8-3 is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the movable object step-up notice effect. The random number SR8-3 for determining the moving object step-up notice takes a value of “1” to “100”.

  E-mail notice determination random number SR8-4 is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the e-mail notice effect. The random number SR8-4 for determining the mail notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number SR8-5 for determining the card notice is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the card notice effect. The random number SR8-5 for card notice determination takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”.

  The frame notice determination random number SR8-6 is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the frame notice effect. The random number SR8-6 for determining the frame notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “50”. The random number SR8-7 for determining the effect blade announcement is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the blade object notification effect. In the random number SR8-7 for determining the effect blade imperative notice, “1” to “50” take load values. The random number SR8-8 for other system notice determination is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the other system notice effect. The random number SR8-8 for other system notice determination takes a value in the range of “1” to “50”.

  Random numbers SR9-1 to 9-6 for determining the first to sixth mini-character notices are random numbers used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first to sixth mini-character notice effects. Random numbers SR9-1 to 9-6 for determining the first to sixth mini character notices take values in the range of “1” to “200”. The contents of each notice effect will be described later.

  In addition to the program for effect control, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. For example, the ROM stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 47 (A) to (D) is used as a table for determining a definite production symbol that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 47A is a final left symbol that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is based on the determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is configured. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47 (B) is a final right symbol that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C is a final final symbol that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 48. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol depending on the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. Are made up of determination data and the like assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized design is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chances of success TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is set in the part that becomes the random chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C, and further in the part that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance HC1 to HC8, or a random chance TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 47 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9C when the specific effect “end of development chance” is executed. , 9R, the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 are determined as the development chances HC1 to HC8 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, for example, as tables for determining a definite effect symbol to be a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 50A is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L among the finalized effect symbols that are the reach-losing combinations. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 162A has a rendering symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination to be assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 50B is a final final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C among the finalized effect symbols that are the reach-losing combinations. -3 is a table that is referred to to determine -3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of effect symbols, the effect symbols start to change in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ When the definite effect symbol that is the variable display result of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a definite effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. The super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-5, the super PB 3-1 to the super PB 3-6, and the super PC 3-1 to the super PC 3-4. The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to the symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” depending on the case where the variation pattern is any of −10. It consists of decision data to be assigned.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 51A to 51D is used as a table for determining a definite effect symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 51 (A) is stopped in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as the determined effect symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 51 (B) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the confirmed effect symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 51 (C) shows the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 are determined as the random chance values TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4. The final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 51 (D) shows the left in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the big hit type is “probable”. The combination of the confirmed effect symbols that become the middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 is selected from the random chance values TC1 to TC4 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 163D is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the probability chance items TC1 to TC4.

  Here, in the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 51 (C), among the random number values SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, “1” to “30” of the random chance value TC1. A value in the range is assigned, and a value in the range of “31” to “55” is assigned to the chance of chance TC2. In addition, a value in the range of “56” to “70” is assigned to the random chance value TC1 in the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol for the random chance value TC3. Is assigned a value in the range of “71” to “80”. On the other hand, in the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 51 (D), among the random number values SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol for the probability chance TC1, “1” to “10”. A value in the range of “11” to “25” is assigned to the chance of chance TC2. Further, a value in the range of “26” to “50” is assigned to the random chance value TC3 for the random chance value TC1 for determining the first final stop symbol, and the random chance value TC1 is assigned to the random chance value TC1. Is assigned a value in the range of “51” to “80”. Therefore, when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, as compared with the case where the big hit type is “surprise”, any one of the winning chance items TC1 and TC2 is used as a combination of the definitive effect symbols as the final stop symbols. The ratio at which either of the random chance items TC3 and TC4 is determined is low. This indicates to the player whether the big hit type is “4th probability change” or “accuracy” depending on which of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. Can do.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A and 164C shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B as tables for determining any one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. Yes. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 52 (A) slips the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-7, super PA4-2, super PA4-7, Super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special According to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PG1-2, special PG2-2, special PG3-3, and special PH3-3. The random value SR6-1 for determining the specific effect pattern is assigned to the specific effect patterns of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4. Etc. and a determined data.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, “left” and By temporarily stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and then causing the effect symbol display area 9R of the “right” to re-variate at high speed, In the “right” effect symbol display area 9R, an effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then “left” and “right”. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol display area L of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a high speed and then stopped and displayed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed in the effect symbol display area 9L. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, “left” and “right” After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol display area 5R is changed to the low speed after the effect symbols are changed again at a low speed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9R is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, “left” and “right” After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol display area 9L of the “left” is re-varied to a low speed and then stopped and displayed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 5L is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 52B indicates the specific effect pattern in the intro TP3 based on the third specific effect pattern determination random number SR6-3 when the specific effect of “Intro” is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-8, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-8, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as the variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is converted to intro TP3 It is comprised from the data for a determination etc. which are assigned to the specific production | generation pattern of -1-intro TP3-3.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. 61 is “1” to “3”. Accordingly, the assignment of the random value 6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to each specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 corresponding to a plurality of types of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to “1” when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to “2” when it is determined as intro TP3-2. When it is determined to be intro TP3-3, it is set to “3”. When the previous effect buffer value is “1”, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-1, and the previous effect buffer value is “2”. In some cases, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-2, and when the previous effect buffer value is “3”, the intro TP3-3 is set to the intro TP3-3. 3 The random value SR6-3 for determining the specific effect pattern is not assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 53A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 53B. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 53A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5. The changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A changes the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to the determination result indicating the presence or absence of the promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, a part of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the promotion effect during the change, and the rest is changing. It is assigned to the determination result without promotion effect. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion failure effect is executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability change”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the rest is determined without the changing promotion effect. Assigned to the result. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation” or “fourth probability variation”, all random number values SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution are assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion during the change is performed. Neither the successful production nor the promotion promotion failure during change is executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 53 (B), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, the table is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5 as a jackpot. It is composed of data for determination assigned to a determination result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion promotion effect or a jackpot promotion failure effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “fourth probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the jackpot. In other words, neither the jackpot promotion promotion effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Is assigned to the judgment result. In this case, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed according to the determination result.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, temporary stop symbols shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (D) are used as tables for determining the effect symbols to be displayed for temporary stop when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D is used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development chance temporary according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the effect symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is an effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the slip / development chance temporary stop symbol is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “1” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to “8” is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. According to the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In response to the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. According to the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4. Contains decision data to be assigned to.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, temporary stops shown in FIGS. 55A to 55F are used as tables for determining the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. Symbol determination tables 167A to 167F are included in the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, whether the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5 or super PA3-4, SuperPA3-5, SuperPA3-9, SuperPA3-10, SuperPA4-4, SuperPA4-5, SuperPA4-9, SuperPA4-10, SuperPA5-4, SuperPA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, PF1-1, special PG1-3 to special PG1-5, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, or until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed It is selected as a usage table in accordance with the remaining number of all-revariable display operations, etc. Here, the remaining number of all-revariable display operations is, for example, the effect design in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Fluctuation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “0”, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed one time before that. The variation of the effect design (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1” and the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed twice before. The final stop symbol will be “2” for the effect symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) and “3” for the effect symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) where the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed three times before. The finalized design that is By quasi continuous change is executed, and corresponds to either a pseudo continuous variation of the number of times after (variation temporary stop symbols are stopped and displayed) is performed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all re-variable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the temporary temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, is temporarily displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the right symbol to be stopped and selected as a use table for determining the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C Is done. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-9, Super PA 3-10, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-5, Super PA 4-9, Super PA 4-10. , Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1 Accordingly, in the case where the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final effect symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the “left” effect symbol display area 9L is displayed. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped, and temporarily stopped in the "right" effect symbol display area 9R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as a symbol, is selected as the usage table for determining a temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 While the design in which the temporary stop displayed on performance symbol display area 9C "medium".

  In the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C, when the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, or special PH1-4, the final effect symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. When the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until “1” is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, “ The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” effect symbol display area 9C. -3 is selected as a use table for determining -3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D performs all replays executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the change pattern being either special PG1-5 or special PH1-5. When the remaining number of times of the variable display operation is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 that becomes the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, the “right” effect symbol display area The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol for temporary stop display at 9R, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the intermediate symbol for temporary stop display in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C, are determined. Selected as a usage table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167E has a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4. -10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, Special PG1 -3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, special PH1-4, the total re-variable display operation that is executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed When the remaining number of times is “2”, the left temporary that becomes the left symbol for temporary stop display in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L Stop symbol KZ3-1, right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2 as a right symbol for temporary stop display in the "right" effect symbol display area 9R, middle symbol for temporary stop display in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167F has a variation pattern of super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, super PB3-5, super PB4-5, super PB5-5. , The rest of the all-revariable display operation that is executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of Super PF1-1, Special PG1-4, or Special PH1-4 When the number of times is “3”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and the temporary stop in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R The right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ4-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C, are determined. It is selected as the used tables for. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, or special PH1-5, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation for re-variation after temporarily displaying the effect symbol is performed only once. Therefore, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F as the use table. The fluctuation pattern is Super PA3-4, Super PA3-9, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-9, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3, Special PH1 In the case of −3, since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after causing the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is two times, it is necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determining table 167F as the use table. Absent.

  The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D shown in FIGS. 55A to 55D are each the symbol number “1” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L. ”To“ 8 ”, the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167E shown in FIG. 55 (E) includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 and a right temporary stop symbol determined using either the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. Depending on whether the combination of KZ2-2 and medium temporary stop symbol 2-3 is the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8, the second pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2 is It consists of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of the right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 55F includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, pseudo continuous fluctuations such as non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, and special PH1-5. Is the variation pattern of one execution or super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-9, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5 -4, special PG1-3, special PH1-3, etc., whether the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern of two times, super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, Special PG1 4. Depending on whether the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation such as special PH1-4 is a variation pattern of three times, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, The effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of 9R can be determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  Also, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4-10, super PA5-4, super PA5-5, super PB4-4, super PB4-5, super PB5-4, super PB5- 5. Referenced when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, such as 5, Super PF1-1 Refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, special PG1-3 to special PG1-5, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, and the big hit type is either "4th probability change" or "surprise accuracy" In the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167C and 167D, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination assigned to each of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is performed. Range of the random number value SR4-1 are different. As a result, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, or the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”. It is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is. Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C that is referred to when the jackpot type is “fourth probable change” and the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), and the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Even in the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D referred to in a certain case, the range of the random number value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol assigned to each of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is different. Yes. As a result, it is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number or the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. .

  In addition, in the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167C and 167D, compared to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol assigned to the pseudo-continuous chance GC2 is determined. The range is set wide. With such a setting, when the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the case of “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability” is the pseudo consecutive chance Since it is easy to be determined as GC2, the player is informed that the jackpot type has been determined as either “4th probability variation” or “surprise accuracy” by displaying the production symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance GC2 temporarily. Can be suggested.

  In addition, the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167E and 167F are set so as to be easily determined at the same pseudo continuous chance as the pseudo continuous chance determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167B to 167D. Therefore, when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”, not only the last pseudo continuous variation but also the pseudo continuous variation before that constitutes the pseudo continuous chance GC2. The effect symbol to be displayed is easily displayed as a temporary stop.

  Furthermore, when the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, or special PH1-4, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is referred to by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. When the variation pattern is special PG1-5 or special PH1-5, it is determined as one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D. When the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “sudden probability”, it is determined to be one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 at the same rate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the jackpot type is determined as “fourth probability change” or “surprise accuracy” from the production symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chances displayed as temporarily stopped. .

  Note that the temporary stop symbol determination table that is referred to when the remaining number of all re-variable display operations is “2” or “3” is super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9. , Super PA3-10, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-5, Super PA4-9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4 , Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1 The variation determined when the jackpot type is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” Either the pattern or the special hit type such as special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, special PH1-4 is "4th probability change" or "surprise" In it, depending whether the variation pattern determined when, may be provided respectively by the plurality. Then, the range of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol assigned to each of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, or the randomness for determining the third pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol. By setting the range of the numerical value SR4-3 to be different, when the effect symbols constituting the different pseudo-continuous chances are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation, The player may be informed that the jackpot type has been determined as either “fourth probability change” or “surprise”. Alternatively, when the effect symbols constituting the same pseudo-continuous chance are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-continuous variation and the second pseudo-continuous variation, the big hit type is “4th probability variation”, “ May be suggested to the player.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 57 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 has a chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols which become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for time is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. ing.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 58 as a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left center right that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the determined effect symbols that become the big hit combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM includes, for example, a design variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 59A, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 59 (A), the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the effect symbol is started to when the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The data indicating the control contents of various effect operations, such as the variable display operation of the effect design in the game, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation in the specific effect, and the first half of the effect display operation in the sudden effect display, It is only necessary to store a plurality of types as patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, various effects according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 60, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period in which the big hit gaming state is controlled as the effect control patterns. Each production control pattern includes, for example, various production control process timer setting values, production control process timer determination values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, end codes, and the like according to the progression of production operations in the big hit gaming state. It is only necessary that the contents of the production control, the production control switching timing, and the like are set in time series.

  As an example, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST 2-1 and the hit control CRE 1-1 continues from the variable display of the effect symbol, and a series of sudden effect indications for displaying an effect image informing that it becomes “accuracy”. After executing the latter half of the effect display operation at, the probability change entry display is executed. The effect control pattern of the hit start CST1-3 and the hit control CRD1-3 is a series of the same contents as the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 effect control pattern continuously from the variable display of the effect symbol. After executing the latter half of the effect display operation in the surprise effect display, the effect display at the start of the big hit is executed. Therefore, when a series of special effects are executed during the period in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the content of the effect control indicates whether to be controlled to the 15th round big hit state or the two round big hit state. Can not be recognized by the player.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 61 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 61 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 80 determines the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 9 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 80 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 120, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 80. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the effect display device 9, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data, thereby generating sound and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 80 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol and the variation of the effect symbol are started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the production symbol (and production symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) ) Is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability change promotion effect, a probability change promotion effect is executed when the probability change promotion effect executing flag indicating execution of the probability change promotion effect is set. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  Big hit end process (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG.64 and FIG.65 is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation start process performed in step S161 of FIG. In this effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “lost” by reading, for example, EXT data of the variable display result notification command. At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the effect symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 8), It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined effect symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 47 (D) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, the combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol.

  When it is determined in step S503 that it is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the definite effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 47A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the effect symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Therefore, the combination of the confirmed effect symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if it is other than a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C, and a constant non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of definite effect symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 50 (A) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the same effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is obtained. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 50B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  In this way, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. The effect symbols which are the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol which becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- 1, the design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability change”, or the variable display result. Is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, it is determined whether it is either one or the other (step S507). At this time, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command, the designated fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5. Or other than those (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 is set to “non-reach” as the variable display mode of the production symbol. Is specified. Therefore, when it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 (step S508; Yes), FIG. The process proceeds to the process of step S503 shown, and the determined effect symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is determined by one of the processes of steps S504 and S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, the process of step S503 shown in FIG. 64 is performed. If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the special PG 1-6 (see FIG. 9), it is determined that the variation pattern executes the specific effect of “end of development chance”. It will be.

  If it is determined in step S508 in FIG. 65 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 (step S508; No), the designated variation is performed. Determine whether the pattern is one of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, special PH3-3, or any other variation pattern (Step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, the variation patterns of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3 are all variable in production design. After the display state is set to the reach state, “normal” reach production is designated. Therefore, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is any of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3. (Step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Step S506 shown in FIG. 64, and a definite effect symbol to be a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 in FIG. 65 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3 variation patterns ( Step S509; No), the specified variation pattern is either the special PG3-1 or the special PH3-1 variation pattern. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, each of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 and the special PH 3-1 is a combination of a definite production symbol that is a variable display result of the production symbol, and any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any one of these special PG3-1 and special PH3-1 variation patterns, the combination of the definitive effect symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, when the specified variation pattern includes the special PG 3-1, the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 51D is selected and set as the use table, and the special PH3- If there is 1, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 51C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance of chances TC1 to TC4. 2, the combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol. In the process of step S510, the special PG3-1 to the special PG3- are referred to without referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 51C or the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 3. Either one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is configured in advance by setting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns of the special PH 3-1 to the special PH 3-3. You may make it determine the combination of the definite effect design used as the last stop design to do.

  In the case where the variable display result is “big hit” in step S507, when the big hit type is neither “fourth probability variation” nor “surprise accuracy” (step S507; No), the variable display result is “big hit”. In such a case, it is determined whether the jackpot type is any one of “normal jackpot” and “third probability variation” or any other (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit” or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S511; Yes), the final effect symbol which becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Are determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 51A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; No), it corresponds to the big hit type being either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. And the combination of the definite effect design which becomes the last stop design which constitutes the probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 51B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 64, or after performing any of the processes of steps S510, S512, and S513 in FIG. 65, the specific effect setting process is performed (step S514). FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), the specific effect is either “slip” or “intro”, or other specific effects. It is determined whether or not there is (step S552). At this time, if it is any one of the specific effects “slip” and “intro”, the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step S553). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 52A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and the specific effect shown in FIG. 52B in the case of the “intro” specific effect. An effect pattern determination table 164C is set.

  Following the process of step S553, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S554). As an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. To do. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is selected from the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S552. To decide. In the case of the “intro” specific effect, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. At this time, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  After performing the determination in step S554, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S555). If the specific effect is “intro” (step S555; Yes), step S554 is performed. The previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C in accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 determined in (Step S556). For example, when the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-1 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “1”. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-2 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “2”. If the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-3 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “3”.

  By executing the processing of step S556 in this way, the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” is displayed. Each time it is determined, it can be updated so that the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the determined intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is set. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. And in the process of step S554, when it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 52 (B) is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the type of effect operation stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” or “intro” (step S552; No), or when it is determined in step S555 that the specific effect is other than “intro” (step) S555; No), or after executing the process of step S556, the specific effect is any one of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “expansion chance”, or other specific effects Is determined (step S557). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo-continuous”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; No), the specific effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is any one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo ream”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; Yes), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop at the specific effect is determined. (Step S558), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S558, as an example, in the case of the specific effect of “slip”, the temporary stop symbol determination table is set according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 54E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the effect symbol which becomes any of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is set to a constant M based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, and special PH1-5, the constant M is set to “1”, and super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super When the variation pattern is any one of PA4-4, Super PA4-9, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3, Special PH1-3, The constant M is set to “2”, and super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, super PB3-5, super PB4-5, super PB5-5, If the variation pattern is any one of the super PF1-1, special PG1-4, and special PH1-4, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 55A is selected and set as the use table, while the fluctuation pattern is super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4-10, super PA5-4, super PA5-5, super PB3-4, super In the case of PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 55 (B) Select and set as the use table. If the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, or special PH1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is either special PG 1-5 or special PH 1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 55 (D) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR4-1, the left middle right temporary that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of the stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E shown in FIG. 55 (E) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F shown in FIG. 55 (F) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated.

  As yet another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 57 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above at step S514 shown in FIG. 64, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S561). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S561; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S561 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probable” (step S561; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. 53A is in progress. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S562). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S563). Based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S563, the jackpot type is “normal” or “first certain change” by referring to the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A set in step S562. The presence or absence of a fostering promotion effect is determined according to which one of “fourth probability change” (step S564). At this time, if it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S565; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S564 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S565; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S566). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S566, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 58 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR2, the effect symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the specific effect setting process in step S515, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (step S516). The effect control CPU 101 stores a plurality of types stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 59 according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S515. Is selected as a usage pattern.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining and setting the content of the notice effect (step S517). The details of the notice effect setting process will be described later (see FIGS. 77 and 78).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern and the content of the notice effect (step S518). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S519).

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. Further, the movable member 78 and the effect blades 79a and 79b are controlled in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  The process table shown in FIG. 68 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each effect control pattern and notice effect. The process table corresponds to a more specific example of the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. If it is determined to execute the notice effect in the process of step S518A, data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects executed in accordance with the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time corresponding to the timer value set as the process timer set value has elapsed, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, and By repeating the process of controlling the effect blades 79a and 79b, an effect in a single change in the effect symbol is realized. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to a production component that is not controlled during the variation period.

  When the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S519, the effect control device (the effect symbol is displayed in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as effect parts to be variably displayed, various lamps as effect parts, the speaker 27 as effect parts, and the movable member 78 and effect blade accessories 79a, 79b) as effect parts. Start (step S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data. Moreover, according to the movable member control data, a drive signal for operating the effect blades 79a and 79b is output.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802). (Step S522).

  Next, the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 70 to FIG. 75 are explanatory diagrams showing respective notice effects in the first step-up notice.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect refers to a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit) is used, the ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step up to a higher stage in the step-up notice effect is higher than when the specific display result is not used. .

  Note that the step-up notice effect may be such that the shape and color of one character changes, and the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player changes stepwise. If it can be recognized as “step-up notice”, it can be said. For example, the number of characters increases stepwise, the number of characters that move stepwise, the number of times the character moves, the frequency, etc. increase stepwise, and the character size increases stepwise. May be. The same applies when the character is replaced with a movable member. That is, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the number of movable members that move stepwise may be increased, or the number of times and the frequency of movement of the movable member may increase stepwise.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 to 75, in the first step-up notice, the main step-up that can execute four notice effects (the notice effect A, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D) and the main step up And a plurality of branch step-ups for branching at a predetermined timing and executing a notice effect different from the notice effect in the main step-up.

  FIG. 70 shows examples of notice effects A to D included in the main step-up. As shown in FIG. 70, as the notice effect A, an effect in which a human character A appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect B, an effect in which a human character B appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect C, an effect in which a human character C appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect D, characters A, B, and C simultaneously appear from the left of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and stop at the center of the screen.

  FIG. 71 shows an example of notice effects E and F included in the first branch step-up among a plurality of branch step-ups. As shown in FIG. 71, when the first branch step-up is executed after branching from the main step-up, an operation button and a box are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 as the notice effect E. When the operation button is pressed by the player, an effect of opening the box and showing the object inside is executed as the notice effect F. As shown in FIG. 74, the first branch step-up branches after the execution of the main step-up notice effect A.

  FIG. 72 shows an example of the notice effects G, H1, and H2 included in the second branch step-up among the plurality of branch step-ups provided. As shown in FIG. 72, when the second branch step-up is executed after branching from the main step-up, an effect in which a sound like a sound such as “go-go-go” is played as the notice effect G. Then, as the notice effect H1, an effect that an earthquake occurs and the ground shakes and the ground breaks is executed. After that, as the notice effect H2, “Mole” comes out from the ground and the effect “Super Reach!” Is executed. As shown in FIG. 75, the second branch step-up branches off during the execution of the main step-up notice effect B.

  FIG. 73 shows an example of the notice effects G, I1, and I2 included in the second branch step-up among the plurality of branch step-ups provided. As shown in FIG. 73, when the second branch step-up is executed after branching from the main step-up, an effect such as “go-go-go” sound such as “go-go-go” is executed as the notice effect G. This effect is the same as the effect shown in FIG. Then, an effect in which lightning occurs is executed as the notice effect I1. As shown in FIG. 75, the notice effect I1 is a notice effect that is further branched after the second branch step-up notice effect G is executed. Thereafter, an effect displayed as “Chance!” Is executed as the notice effect I2.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing each notice effect in the second step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 76, in the second step-up notice, three notice effects (notice effect X, notice effect Y, and notice effect Z) can be executed. As shown in FIG. 75, as the notice effect X, an effect in which a beetle character flies from the right side of the screen in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Y, an effect in which the beetle character stays on the tree in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Z, an effect is performed in which the image of the tree displayed in the second system notice area 92 on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged. In this embodiment, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice can be executed simultaneously in the same period.

  77 and 78 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting process. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 selects a notice type selection table corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern command (step S571).

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram of a notice type selection table. As shown in FIG. 79, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is non-reach PA1-1, PA1-2, PA1-7, PB1-1, PC1-1, the notice type corresponding to the variation pattern. A selection table (the uppermost table in FIG. 79) is selected. In this table, the first step-up notice, the mail notice (the notice effect that receives the mail and opens the mail according to the operation of the operation button 120), the card notice (the notice effect that turns the card automatically when the card comes out) ), Moving object step-up notice (step-up notice effect for stepping up the aspect of the notice effect when the movable member 78 moves stepwise), and other system liquid crystal notice (first step-up notice and second step-up notice) A judgment value is assigned to any of the notice effects executed on the liquid crystal screens of different systems. Therefore, in the case of fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1, PA1-2, PA1-7, PB1-1, PC1-1, the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and other systems Any of the LCD notices can be executed.

  Further, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a non-reach fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation pattern specified in the normal state is 5 to 8 and is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a notice corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is given. A type selection table (second table in FIG. 79) is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned only to the first step-up notice. Accordingly, in the case of the non-reach PA1-3 variation pattern, only the first step-up notice can be executed.

  If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is non-reach PA1-4 in which “slip” is executed as a specific effect, a notice type selection table corresponding to the variation pattern (the table in the third row in FIG. 79). ) Is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the non-reach PA1-4 variation pattern, any of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  Also, the non-reach PB1-2 or non-reach PC1-2, which is a non-reach variation pattern when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is in the short-time state or the probable variation state and the number of stored storages is 5 to 8, For example, the notice type selection table (fourth table in FIG. 79) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. In this table, no judgment value is assigned to any notice, and a judgment value is assigned only to “no notice”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 or non-reach PC1-2, any notice effect cannot be executed. In this way, the notice effect is not executed in the short-time state or the probable change state because the change time is shortened in the short-time state or the probable change state, so it is difficult to execute the notice effect. Because there is.

  In addition, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern in which “intro” is executed as a specific effect, non-reach PA1-6, super-offset PA3-3, PA3-8, PB3-3, jackpot PA4-3 , PA4-8, PA5-3, PB4-3, and PB5-3, the notice type selection table (the fifth table in FIG. 79) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned only to the first step-up notice. Therefore, in the case of non-reach PA1-6, super-offset PA3-3, PA3-8, PB3-3, jackpot PA4-3, PA4-8, PA5-3, PB4-3, PB5-3, Only one step-up notice can be executed.

  Further, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a special PG1-1, PG1-2, PG1-6, PG2-1, PG2-2, PG3-1 to PG3-3, PH3-1 to PH3- If it is 3, the notice type selection table (the sixth table in FIG. 79) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1, PG1-2, PG1-6, PG2-1, PG2-2, PG3-1 to PG3-3, PH3-1 to PH3-3, the first step-up advance notice , E-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a special PG1-3, PG1-4, PH1-3, or PH1-4 for abruptness, the notice type selection table (7 in FIG. 79) corresponding to the variation pattern is used. Select the table in the second row. Also in this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-3, PG1-4, PH1-3, PH1-4, all of the first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice It becomes executable.

  If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is special PG1-5 or PH1-5 for sudden identification, the notice type selection table (the seventh row table in FIG. 79) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. . Also in this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the special PG 1-5 and PH 1-5, any of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  Furthermore, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern other than those described above, a notice type selection table (the table at the bottom in FIG. 79) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. Also in this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in this case, any of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the notice type selection random number SR7, compares the extracted random number value with the determination value in the table selected in step S571, and sets the notice type associated with the matching determination value. Then, it is determined as a notice type that can be executed by the current variation (step S572).

  As described above, one of the plurality of types of notices (first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice) can be executed with this change. And decide. Then, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect of the decided notice type. The reason for this is to prevent the presentation from becoming complicated if too many announcements are executed at the same time, making it difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the announcement. is there.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first step-up notice can be executed (whether or not the notice type determined in step S572 is the first step-up notice) (step S573). If the 1-step-up notice can be executed, the first notice setting table shown in FIGS. 80 to 85 corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S574). Here, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 85, a table is prepared for each variation pattern shown in FIGS. Then, the production control CPU 101 selects the first notice setting table corresponding to the variation pattern by confirming the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern command.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the first notice setting table of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, “step C (ie notice effect C)”, “step D (notice effect D)”, “branch steps G and H (ie notice) No determination value is assigned to “effects G, H1, H2)” and “branch steps G, I (that is, notice effects G, I1, I2)”. Therefore, when the notice effect C in the main step-up or the notice effect G in the branch step-up is executed, the occurrence of reach is confirmed.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the first notice setting table of the normal reach variation pattern, no determination value is assigned to “step D (that is, notice effect D)”. Therefore, when the notice effect D in the main step-up is executed, the occurrence of super reach is confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 82, also in the first notice setting table of the variation pattern (special PG1-1, etc.) selected when suddenness or fourth likelihood change occurs, a determination value is assigned to a predetermined notice effect. ing. Therefore, the notice effect is executed even during the fluctuation based on the fluctuation pattern of the special PG 1-1 or the like. However, for “step C”, “step D”, “branch steps G and H (that is, notice effects G, H1, and H2)” and “branch steps G and I (that is, notice effects G, I1, and I2)”. Judgment value is not allocated. Therefore, when the notice effect C in the main step-up or the notice effect G in the branch step-up is executed, no sudden big hit or fourth big odd big hit will occur. However, when a pseudo-ream occurs, even if the notice effect C in the main step up or the notice effect G in the branch step up is executed, a sudden big hit or a fourth probability variable big hit may occur. (See FIGS. 83 to 85).

  In the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 83, a variation pattern of one pseudo-continuous is set. In order to make it appear that two fluctuations are apparently performed during one fluctuation in the one-time fluctuation pattern, the notice effect is the notice effect at the first change and the notice effect at the second change. And the set is set.

  In the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 84, a variation pattern of two pseudo-continuations is set. In the quasi-continuous two-time fluctuation pattern, it appears that three fluctuations seem to have occurred during one fluctuation, so the notice effect is the notice effect at the first change and the notice effect at the second change. And the third variation notice announcement are set.

  In the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 85, a variation pattern of three pseudo-series is set. In the variation pattern of the three-time quasi-continuation, it appears as if the four fluctuations seemed to have occurred during the first fluctuation, so the notice effect is the notice effect at the first change and the notice effect at the second change. And a set of a third notice notice variation and a fourth notice effect change are set.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts the first step-up notice effect determination random number SR8-1, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value of the first notice setting table selected in step S574, thereby changing the current variation. It is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed and the mode of the notice effect when the notice effect is executed (step S575). Then, control goes to a step S584.

  80 to 85, the “appearance rate” indicates the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected in the variation pattern setting process of FIG. Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern is selected as the big hit, the probability of the big hit is 1/300, and the big hit variation pattern type is determined at a predetermined ratio according to the big hit type. A variation pattern is selected at a predetermined rate from among the selected jackpot variation pattern types, and the first step-up notification is selected from a plurality of types of notification types as a notification type to be executed for the selected variation pattern. Therefore, it is obtained from 1/300 × (variation pattern type selection ratio) × (variation pattern selection ratio) × (selection ratio of first step-up notice). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the big hit is determined, and the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, the rate at which the variation pattern of the big PA for normal PA 2-5 is selected is 1 / 300 × (selection ratio of normal CA3-1 in FIG. 13A (74/241)) × (selection ratio of variation pattern of normal PA2-5 in CA3-1 in FIG. 18 (12/251) × (FIG. 79 selection ratio (121/191) of the first step-up notice.

  In addition, the probability that the variation pattern of the loss of reach is selected has a probability of loss of 299/300, and whether or not to reach is determined. When it is determined that the reach is determined, the variation pattern for reach is determined at a predetermined rate. A type is selected, a variation pattern is selected at a predetermined rate from the selected variation pattern types for reach, and a first step-up notification is made from among a plurality of types of notification types as a notification type to be executed for the selected variation pattern. Is selected from 299/300 × (reach occurrence probability) × (variation pattern type selection ratio) × (variation pattern selection ratio) × (first step-up notice selection ratio). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the variation pattern of the reach normal PA 2-1 is selected is 299/300 × (reach HA2 in FIG. 15A). -1 selection ratio (35/239))) x (selection ratio of normal CA2-1 in FIG. 16A (128/241)) x (variation pattern of normal PA2-1 in normal CA2-1 in FIG. 22) Selection ratio (148/251) × (selection ratio (121/191) of first step-up notice in FIG. 79).

  In addition, the probability that the variation pattern of non-reach is selected is 299/300, and it is determined whether or not to reach, and when it is determined not to reach, non-reach is determined at a predetermined rate. A variation pattern type is selected, a variation pattern is selected at a predetermined rate from the selected non-reach variation pattern types, and a notification type to be executed for the selected variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of notification types. Since 1 step up notice is selected, 299/300 × (probability of non-reach) × (variation pattern type selection ratio) × (variation pattern selection ratio) × (first step up notice selection ratio) Desired. For example, when the gaming state is a normal state and the number of reserved memories is 0, the ratio at which the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1 is selected is 299/300 × (non-reach HA1-in FIG. 15A). 1 (selection ratio (204/239))) × (selection ratio of non-reach CA1-1 in FIG. 17A (216/241)) × (non-reach PA1-1 in non-reach CA1-1 in FIG. 21) Variation pattern selection ratio (251/251) × (selection ratio (121/191) of first step-up notice in FIG. 79).

  The “appearance rate” shown in FIGS. 80 to 85 is the appearance rate in the normal state when the game state is a variation pattern that can appear in any of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short time state. In the case of a variation pattern other than a variation pattern that can appear only when the number of reserved memories is a specific value (a variation pattern set according to the number of reserved memories such as a non-reach variation pattern), the number of reserved memories Is the appearance rate when is zero. Further, in the case of a variation pattern that can appear in a specific game state (probability change state or short time state), it is the appearance rate in that specific game state. In the case of a variation pattern that can appear only when the number of reserved memories is a specific value, it is the appearance rate when the number of reserved memories is a specific value.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance rate of each notice in the first step-up notice. FIG. 87 is an explanatory view showing the reliability of the big hit of each notice. In FIG. 86, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of outliers, the appearance rate is shown when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the normal state, and in the case of the big hit change pattern, the appearance rate in the normal state is shown.

  The appearance rate of each notice (each step) in the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 86 is obtained as follows. First, the appearance rate of each notice is calculated for each of the deviation variation patterns that can appear when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 80, in the case of normal PA2-1, the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern is 4.571% (= 0.04571). Then, determination values 1 to 200 are assigned to “none”, determination values 201 to 400 are assigned to “step A”, determination values 401 to 450 are assigned to “step B”, and “ Determination values 451 to 455 are assigned to “step C”, determination values 456 to 495 are assigned to “branch steps E and F”, and determination values 496 to 500 are assigned to “branch steps G and H”. Assigned. Therefore, the appearance rate of “none” is obtained as 0.04571 × 200/500, the appearance rate of “step A” is obtained as 0.04571 × 200/500, and the appearance rate of “step B” is 0.04571. × 50/500, the appearance rate of “Step C” is determined as 0.04571 × 5/500, the appearance rate of “Branch Steps E and F” is determined as 0.04571 × 40/500, “ The appearance rate of the branch step G, H ”is obtained as 0.04571 × 5/500.

  Moreover, the appearance rate of each notice is calculated for each of the big hit variation patterns that can appear in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 81, in the case of normal PA 2-5, the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern is 0.00625% (= 0.0000625). Then, determination values 1 to 100 are assigned to “none”, determination values 101 to 300 are assigned to “step A”, and determination values 301 to 370 are assigned to “step B”. Determination values 371 to 400 are assigned to “step C”, determination values 401 to 460 are assigned to “branch steps E and F”, and determination values 461 to 480 are assigned to “branch steps G and H”. The determination values 481 to 500 are assigned to “branch steps G and I”. Therefore, the appearance rate of “None” is calculated as 0.0000625 × 100/500, the appearance rate of “Step A” is calculated as 0.0000625 × 200/500, and the appearance rate of “Step B” is 0.0000625. X70 / 500, the appearance rate of “Step C” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 30/500, the appearance rate of “branch steps E and F” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 60/500, “ The appearance rate of “branch steps G and H” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 20/500, and the appearance rate of “branch steps G and I” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 20/500.

  Next, for each notice effect (“none” “step A” “step B” “step C” “step D” “branch steps E and F” “branch steps G and H” “branch steps G and I”) The total (NH, AH, BH, CH, DH, EH, HH, IH) is calculated by adding up the appearance rates of the respective variation patterns that can appear at the time of deviation. Also, for each notice effect (“none” “step A” “step B” “step C” “step D” “branch steps E and F” “branch steps G and H” “branch steps G and I”) In this case, the total (NA, AA, BA, CA, DA, EA, HA, IA) is calculated by adding up the appearance ratios of the variation patterns that can appear.

  The reliability of each notice (each step) in the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 87 is obtained as follows. That is, NH / (NH + NA) in the case of “None”, the calculation formula of “Step A”, the calculation formula of AH / (AH + AA) in the case of “Step A”, and BH / (BH + BA) in the case of “Step B”. In the case of “step C”, the calculation formula of CH / (CH + CA), in the case of “step D”, the calculation formula of DH / (DH + DA), and in the case of “branch steps E and F”, EH / (EH + EA In the case of “branch step G, H”, the reliability is obtained from the calculation formula of HH / (HH + HA), and in the case of “branch step G, I”, the calculation formula of IH / (IH + IA).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the reliability in the case of “none” is “0.115230481”, the reliability in the case of “step A” is “0.3188880209”, and “step The reliability in the case of “B” is “0.38193149”, the reliability in the case of “Step C” is “1.893339804”, and the reliability in the case of “Step D” is “5.914387”. Yes, the reliability in the case of “branch step E, F” is “0.412419178”, the reliability in the case of “branch step G, H” is “2.8155565359”, and the “branch step G, I In the case of "", the reliability is "5.14643999".

  From the above, the reliability in the “branch steps E and F” is higher than the reliability in the “step B”. That is, branch step-up branching after step A for main step-up notice is executed than when step B (notice effect B) is executed after step A (notice effect A) for main step-up is executed. When steps E and F (notice effects E and F) are executed, it means that the reliability of the jackpot is higher. According to such a configuration, as in the case of the branch step-up notice, the case where the branch step-up notice is executed is larger than the case where the main step-up notice is completed at step B executed after step A. Since the possibility is high, the player has great expectation when diverging, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the reliability in the case of “step C” is higher than the reliability in the case of “branch steps E and F”. That is, after step A (notice effect B) of main step-up is executed, step B (notice effect B) is executed, and further, step C (notice effect C) is executed. This means that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the branch steps E and F (notification effects E and F) of the branch step up are executed after step A is executed. According to such a configuration, when step B is executed after step A in the main step-up notice, the reliability is lower than when branch steps E and F of branch step-up are executed. When step C is executed after B, the reliability is higher than when branch steps E and F of the branch step up are executed. Therefore, even if the step up does not branch, the expectation of the big hit is long. It can be maintained, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  The reliability in the case of “branch steps G and H” and “branch steps G and I” is higher than the reliability in the case of “branch steps E and F”. That is, the program branches after step A of the main step-up notice is executed and branches in the middle of step B of the main step-up notice, compared to the case where the branch steps E and F (notice effects E and F) are executed. When branch steps G and H (notice effects G and H) and branch steps G and I (notice effects G and I) are executed, it means that the reliability of the jackpot is higher. According to such a configuration, since the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the branch timing is late, it is possible to maintain the expectation of whether or not to branch for a long time, and to further improve the interest of the game Can do.

  Furthermore, the reliability in the case of “branch steps G and I” is higher than the reliability in the case of “branch steps G and H”. According to such a configuration, when branching from the main step-up and further branching from the branch step-up, it means that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high, and the expectation for the branch can be increased.

  In addition, the reliability of this time has been described in detail with respect to the reliability when the gaming state is the normal state and the reserved memory number is 0 as an example. The same applies to the case where is in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  If it is determined in step S573 that the first step-up notice cannot be executed (N in step S573), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the mail notice can be executed (that is, as the notice type in step S572). It is determined whether or not an e-mail notice has been determined (step S576). When it is determined that the mail notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the mail notice determination random number SR8-4, and based on the extracted random number value, the mail notice selection table shown in FIG. 88 and FIG. A mail notice mode (contents) is determined using the mail message determination table shown in FIG. 91 (step S577). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the mode (contents and pattern) of the mail notice will be described.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a mail notice pattern.

  In FIG. 88, (A) shows a big hit mail notice selection table. In FIG. 88, (B) shows an email notice selection table at the time of reach failure. 88 (C) shows a non-reach out-of-reach email notice selection table. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot e-mail notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a button notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “big hit” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a mail message determination table as a notice pattern determination table used for determination of a message. In the big hit mail notice selection table, data is set so that a different mail message determination table is selected according to the number of pseudo-runs performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command.

  Specifically, in the jackpot mail notice selection table shown in (A), the mail message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern that does not become a pseudo-ream (hereinafter referred to as no pseudo-ream) is designated, the first mail message determination table 201A shown in FIG. 89 is selected.

  Also, when a variation pattern that performs one pseudo-continuation is designated, the second mail message determination table 201B shown in FIG. 89 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first variation (at the first variation), The third mail message determination table 201C shown in FIG. 89 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change).

  Also, when a variation pattern that performs two pseudo-continuations is designated, the fourth mail message determination table 201D shown in FIG. 89 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the first variation (at the first variation), The fifth mail message determination table 201E shown in FIG. 89 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of change) is determined. The sixth mail message determination table 201F shown in FIG. 89 is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern that performs three pseudo-continuations is designated, a seventh mail message determination table 211A shown in FIG. 89 is selected to determine a notice pattern at the time of the first variation (at the first variation). The eighth mail message determination table 201H shown in FIG. 89 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of change) is determined. 89, the ninth mail message determination table 201I shown in FIG. 89 is selected, and the tenth mail message determination table 201J shown in FIG. 89 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change).

  The reach failure notification notice table shown in (B) is specific when a button advance notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a reach deviation change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach miss” is specified. This is a data table for selecting a mail message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the out-of-reach e-mail notice selection table, data is set so that different e-mail message determination tables are selected according to the number of pseudo-reams performed in the variation pattern specified by the effect control command.

  In the out-of-reach e-mail notice selection table shown in (B), specifically, the e-mail message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first mail message determination table 211A shown in FIG. 90 is selected.

  Also, when the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous two times is designated, the second mail message determination table 211B shown in FIG. 90 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first fluctuation (at the first fluctuation), and the second time 90 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of change (at the time of re-change), and the figure is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change). The fourth mail message determination table 211D shown in 90 is selected.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the fourth pseudo-continuation is designated, the fifth mail message determination table 211E shown in FIG. 90 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first fluctuation (at the first fluctuation), and the second time 90 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of change (at the time of re-change), and the figure is used to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change). The seventh mail message determination table 211G shown in 90 is selected, and the eighth mail message determination table 211H shown in FIG. 90 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change).

  The non-reach miss e-mail notice selection table shown in (C) indicates that when a non-reach miss change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated, a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type. This is a data table for selecting a mail message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach out-of-reach e-mail notice selection table, data is set so that a different e-mail message determination table is selected according to the number of pseudo-reams performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command.

  In the non-reach out-of-reach email notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the email message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first mail message determination table 221A shown in FIG. 91 is selected.

  When the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous once” is designated, the second mail message determination table 211B shown in FIG. 91 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first fluctuation (at the first fluctuation), The third mail message determination table 211C shown in FIG. 91 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change).

  Next, the contents of the first mail message determination table 201A to the tenth mail message determination table 201J used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first mail message determination table 201A to the tenth mail message determination table 201J.

  89, (A) to (J) show the first mail message determination table 201A to the tenth mail message determination table 201J. In each mail message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the mail notice determination random number SR8-4 and the display contents of the selected notice message (notice message in the figure) is shown.

  In the first mail message determination table 201A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no pseudo-ream”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the second mail message determination table 201B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “. And “GOOD LUCK” are selected, and other warning messages are not selected. Therefore, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “one pseudo-ream”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense fever”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  In the third mail message determination table 201C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern of “one pseudo-ream”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  However, regarding the third mail message determination table 201C, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the second (this time) change of “Time”, a prohibition process that prohibits the selection of a notice effect with a lower degree of reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “Pseudo Series 1” (notice message) Forbidden processing). For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the second mail message determination table 201B in the first (previous) variation of “pseudo-continuation once”, the second (current) variation of “pseudo-continuation once” , A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition processing of such a notice message are as follows, for example. When a notice message as a notice pattern is determined when executing pseudo-variable display, the previous notice message data for specifying the decided notice message is stored in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous notice pattern. (Update storage). Then, when executing the next fluctuation display in the pseudo-ream, the previous notice message specified by the previous notice message data and the trust that becomes the big hit for the current selection notice message selected using the third mail message determination table 201C Compare degrees. When the selected notice message is lower in reliability than the previous notice message, the previous notice message is determined as the notice message in the next fluctuation display so that the notice message having lower reliability than the previous fluctuation display is not decided. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the current selection notice message is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous notice message, the current selection notice message is determined as the notice message in the next change display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the types of notice messages, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated with each other in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the larger the numerical value). A flag corresponding to the type of the notice message is set as data indicating the previous notice message. Then, the flag set as the previous notice message is compared with the flag corresponding to the notice message in the current fluctuation, and based on the magnitude relationship of the numerical value of the flag, whichever is the selected notice message or the previous notice message Judge whether reliability is high.

  In the fourth mail message determination table 201D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern is “2 pseudo-continuous times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  In the fifth mail message determination table 201E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “hot”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, with respect to the fifth mail message determination table 201E, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuation 2” is set. For the second time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected on the basis of the fourth mail message determination table 201D for the first (previous) change of “pseudo continuous twice”, the second (current) of “pseudo continuous twice” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” With low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the notice message prohibition process having the above-described content is performed on the fifth mail message determination table 201E.

  In the sixth mail message determination table 201F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, for the sixth mail message determination table 201F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the fifth mail message determination table 201E in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous twice”, the third (current) of “pseudo-continuous twice” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” With low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the notice message prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth mail message determination table 201F.

  In the seventh mail message determination table 201G of (G), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that any one of the “GOOD LUCK” notice messages is selected. Therefore, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the eighth mail message determination table 201H of (H), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “. , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo three times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, with respect to the eighth mail message determination table 201H, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-ream 3” is set. For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the ninth mail message determination table 201I of (I), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense fever”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, with respect to the ninth mail message determination table 201I, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the tenth mail message determination table 201J of (J), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, with respect to the tenth mail message determination table 201J, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the 4th (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit the selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 3rd (previous) change of “3 pseudo-reams”. .

  Next, the contents of the first mail message determination table 211A to the eighth mail message determination table 211H used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first mail message determination table 211A to the eighth mail message determination table 211H.

  90, (A) to (H) show the first mail message determination table 211A to the eighth mail message determination table 211H. In each mail message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-4 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure) is shown.

  In the first mail message determination table 211A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that a notice message of any one of “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no pseudo-ream”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the second mail message determination table 211B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “. , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern is “2 pseudo-continuous times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  In the third mail message determination table 211C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense fever”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, regarding the third mail message determination table 211C, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuation 2” is set. For the second time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. .

  In the fourth mail message determination table 211D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, regarding the fourth mail message determination table 211D, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. .

  In the fifth mail message determination table 211E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that any one of the “GOOD LUCK” notice messages is selected. Therefore, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the sixth mail message determination table 211F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “. , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo three times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, with respect to the sixth mail message determination table 201H, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-ream 3” is set. For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the seventh mail message determination table 211G of (G), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense fever”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, regarding the seventh mail message determination table 211G, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the eighth mail message determination table 211H of (H), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that a notice message of any one of “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, regarding the eighth mail message determination table 211H, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the 4th (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit the selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 3rd (previous) change of “3 pseudo-reams”. .

  Next, the contents of the first mail message determination table 221A to the third mail message determination table 221C used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first mail message determination table 221A to the third mail message determination table 221C.

  91, (A) to (C) show the first mail message determination table 221A to the third mail message determination table 221C. In each mail message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-4 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure) is shown.

  In the first mail message determination table 221A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, one of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4. A notice message is selected and other notice messages are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-ream” that is out of reach, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the second mail message determination table 221B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, one of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4. A notice message is selected and other notice messages are not selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach” “pseudo-continuous once”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  In the third mail message determination table 221C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, one of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4. A notice message is selected and other notice messages are not selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the non-reach deviation “pseudo-continuous once” fluctuation pattern, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  However, regarding the third mail message determination table 221C, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 1 For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous”. .

  For each mail message determination table as described above, the upper limit value of the random number used for the selection determination of the notice message is set differently for the first change, the second change, and the third change. May be. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  If it is determined in step S576 that the e-mail notice cannot be executed (N in step S576), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the card notice can be executed (that is, the card notice is set as the notice type in step S572). It is determined whether or not it has been determined (step S578). When it is determined that the card notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the mail notice determination random number SR8-5, and based on the extracted random number value, the card notice selection table shown in FIG. A card notice determination mode (contents) is determined using the card message determination table shown in FIG. 95 (step S579). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the mode (contents and pattern) of the card notice will be described.

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a card notice pattern. In FIG. 92, (A) shows a big hit button notice selection table. (B) shows a button notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach. (C) shows a step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach.

  The jackpot button notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting the card message determination table as a notice pattern determination table used for determination of this. In the big hit button notice selection table, data is set so as to select a different card message determination table according to the number of pseudo-runs performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command.

  Specifically, in the jackpot button notice selection table shown in (A), the card message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first card message determination table 203A shown in FIG. 93 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo sequence once” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first and second variations, FIG. 93 shows. The second card message determination table 203B is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous two times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 93 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to third variations. The third card message determination table 203C is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous, FIG. 93 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variation. The fourth card message determination table 203D is selected.

  The reach-out button notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a reach-out variation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “reach out” is specified. It is a data table for selecting the card message determination table used for determination of a detailed notice pattern. In the reach failure button notice selection table, data is set so as to select a different card message determination table in accordance with the number of pseudo-reams performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command.

  Specifically, the card message determination table is selected as follows in the out-of-reach button notice selection table shown in (B). For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first card message determination table 213A shown in FIG. 94 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 94 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to third variations. The second card message determination table 213B is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 94 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variation. The third card message determination table 213C is selected.

  The non-reach miss button notice selection table shown in (C) shows the case where a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a non-reach break change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a card message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off button notice selection table, data is set so that a different card message determination table is selected according to the number of pseudo-runs performed in the variation pattern specified by the effect control command.

  In the non-reach off button notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the card message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first notice message determination table 223A shown in FIG. 95 is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern “pseudo-continuous once” is designated, the second card message determination table 223B shown in FIG. 95 is used to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first and second variations. Selected.

  Next, the contents of the first card message determination table 203A to the fourth card message determination table 203D used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first card message determination table 203A to the fourth card message determination table 203D. In the case of a card notice, the notice message is selected and used from among “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER”.

  93, (A) to (D) show the first card message determination table 203A to the third card message determination table 203D. In each card message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-5, the display content of the selected notice message (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. ing.

  In the first card message determination table 203A in (A), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 1-1 to 1-3 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. The first card message determination table 203A is set so that any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected as the first notice message. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  In the second card message determination table 203B in (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 2-1 to 2-5 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the second card message determination table 203B, a setting is made so that, in the first fluctuation, either a notice message “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. Has been. In addition, for the second fluctuation, setting is made such that any of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. ing.

  In the third card message determination table 203C in (C), any one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 3-1 to 3-7 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the third card message determination table 203C, a notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5 in each of the first and second fluctuations. It is set to be. In addition, for the third change, a setting is made so that one of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. ing.

  In the fourth card message determination table 203D in (D), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 4-1 to 4-9 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the fourth card message determination table 203D, in each of the first to third fluctuations, a notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. It is set to be. In addition, the fourth change is set so that any of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. ing.

  Next, the contents of the first card message determination table 213A to the third card message determination table 213C used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first card message determination table 213A to the third card message determination table 213C.

  In FIG. 94, the first card message determination table 213A to the third card message determination table 213C are shown in (A) to (C). In each card message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-5, the display content of the selected notice message (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. ing.

  In the first card message determination table 213A of (A), one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 5-1 to 5-2 are attached is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the first card message determination table 213A, a setting is made such that either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected as the first notice message. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no pseudo-continuous”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  In the second card message determination table 213B of (B), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 6-1 to 6-4 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the second card message determination table 213B, in each of the first to third fluctuations, a notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. It is set to be.

  In the third card message determination table 213C of (C), any one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 7-1 to 7-5 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the third card message determination table 213C, the notice message “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5 in each of the first to fourth fluctuations. It is set to be.

  Next, the contents of the first card message determination table 223A to the second card message determination table 223B used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first card message determination table 223A to the second card message determination table 223B.

  In the first card message determination table 223A of (A), one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 8-1 to 8-2 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. The first card message determination table 223A is set so that either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected as the first notice message.

  In the second card message determination table 223B of (B), one of the notice patterns to which the setting pattern numbers 9-1 to 9-3 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the second card message determination table 223B, the notice message “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5 in the first and second fluctuations. It is set to be.

  When it is determined in step S578 that the e-mail notice cannot be executed (N in step S578), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the movable object step-up notice can be executed (that is, as the notice type in step S572). It is determined whether or not the movable object step-up notice has been determined (step S580). When it is determined that the movable object step-up advance notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the movable object step-up notice determination random number SR8-3, and based on the extracted random number value, the allowable control shown in FIG. Using the animal notice selection table, the mode (contents) of the movable object step-up notice is determined (step S581). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the content (presence / absence, mode) of the movable object step-up notice will be described.

  The movable object step-up notice effect is a notice effect that changes the operation mode of the movable member 78 stepwise from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. For example, a notice effect such that the number of times the movable member 78 moves is increased stepwise (the first step (first stage) is the movable member 78 is moved once, and the next step (second stage) is the movable member 78 is moved. This is an effect in which the movable member 78 rotates three times in the second step (third stage). It should be noted that the range of movement of the movable member 78 changes stepwise (in the first step, the movable member 78 moves in a narrow range, and in the next step, the movable member 78 moves in a medium range). In the next step, the movable member 78 may change so as to move in a wide range). Further, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the number of movable members that move stepwise may be increased, and the speed and frequency of movement of the movable member may increase stepwise. In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit) is used, the notice effect that changes the operation mode of the movable member 78 step by step is executed up to a higher stage in the movable object step-up notice effect than when the specific display result is not used. The ratio to do becomes high.

  The movable object notice selection table shown in FIG. 96 is provided with a table at the time of disconnection and a table at the time of a big hit. In the movable object notice selection table for detachment and the movable object notice selection table for big hits, only the notice effect “none” and the notice effect K (for example, an effect in which the movable member 78 rotates once) are executed (“ K "development pattern), an effect mode (e.g.," K → L "development pattern) in which a notice effect L (for example, an effect in which the movable member 78 rotates twice) is executed after the notice effect K is executed, and a notice effect. An effect mode (a development pattern of “K → L → M”) in which a notice effect L is executed after K is executed, and then a notice effect M (for example, an effect in which the movable member 78 rotates three times) is executed. Is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the movable object notice selection table, “None” is selected at a higher probability than when a big hit is made, and “K → “L” and “K → L → M” are selected with high probability.

  In step S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the movable object step-up notice determination random number SR8-3, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the movable object notice determination table. Then, based on the notice effect (“None”, “K”, “K → L”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence and effect mode of the movable object step-up notice effect are determined. To do.

  When it is determined in step S580 that the movable object step-up advance notice is not executable (N in step S580), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the other system liquid crystal advance notice can be executed (that is, in step S572). Whether or not another system liquid crystal notice is determined as a type) is determined (step S582). When it is determined that the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the other system liquid crystal determination random number SR8-8, and based on the extracted random number value, the other system liquid crystal shown in FIG. The presence / absence of another system liquid crystal notice is determined using the notice selection table (step S583). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the presence / absence of another system liquid crystal notice will be described.

  The effect control CPU 101 uses the other system liquid crystal notice selection table shown in FIG. 98 to determine the presence / absence of another system liquid crystal notice effect (a notice effect of a different system from other notices such as step-up notice and button notice). (Step S583). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the other system liquid crystal notice selection is determined using the other system liquid crystal notice selection table. When the big hit, the other system liquid crystal notice selection table is used for the big hit. Determine the content of the production.

  In this embodiment, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a predetermined image (character image or button notice (email notice, card notice) that appears in the step-up notice on the display screen of the effect display device 9. ) And an image different from the image of the mini character) are displayed at a predetermined timing to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit. That is, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a notice effect that changes a predetermined image once or a plurality of times on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  The other-system liquid crystal notice selection table shown in FIG. 98 is provided with a table for loss and a table for big hit. In each other system liquid crystal notice selection table, the notice effect “none” and the notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S583, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-8 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the other system liquid crystal notice selection table. . Then, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 determines the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect using the second notice setting table shown in FIG. 97 (step S584).

  In this embodiment, as described above (see FIG. 76), the content of the second step-up notice effect is stepped on the background image in the upper display area (second system notice area) of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is directed to make changes (development, conversion).

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and selects the second notice setting table corresponding to the variation pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, a non-reach PA1-6 fluctuation pattern, a non-reach fluctuation pattern other than non-reach PA1-6, a super PA3-3, a super PA3-8, and a super Variation pattern of PB3-3, variation pattern other than super PA3-3, super PA3-8, and super PB3-3 when out of reach, super PA4-3, super 4-8, super PA5-3 at big hit, The variation pattern of Super PB4-3 and Super PB5-3, the second corresponding to the variation pattern other than Super PA4-3, Super 4-8, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3 and Super PB5-3 at the time of big hit Select the notice setting table. As shown in FIG. 97, in the second notice setting table, the notice effect “none”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice after the notice effect X is executed are displayed. An effect mode in which the effect Y is executed (the development pattern of “X → Y”) and an effect mode in which the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (“X → Y”) The development pattern of “→ Z”) and the production mode (the development pattern of “X → Z”) in which the screen is turned off after the notice effect X is executed and then the notice effect Z is executed are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. As shown in FIG. 97, in the case of a variation pattern in which the specific effect “intro” is not executed, since the determination value is not assigned to “X → Y → Z” or “X → Z”, the notice effect Z is Never executed.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “X,“ X → Y ”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the frame (lamp) notice effect using the frame (lamp) notice setting table shown in FIG. 98 (step S585). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table, and the contents of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern. In other words, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) the lighting pattern step by step once or a plurality of times). The specific contents of the frame notice effect will be omitted.

  The frame notice setting table shown in FIG. 98 is provided with a table at the time of loss and a table at the time of big hit. In each frame notice setting table, a notice effect “none” and a frame notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the frame advance notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-6 for determining the frame notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the frame notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the frame notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of the mini character notice effect using the mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 99 (step S586).

  In this embodiment, six types of mini character notice effects are provided, and six mini character notice setting tables corresponding to six kinds of mini character notices are prepared. Then, it is determined whether or not six kinds of mini characters appear. The types of mini characters include a mini character (first mini character) that can appear with a high probability at the time of a big hit, a mini character (second mini character) that can appear with a high probability when the variation pattern is a development opportunity, and a variation pattern. A mini character that can appear with a high probability at the time of (3rd mini character), a mini character that can appear with a high probability at the time of a probable big hit (fourth mini character), and a high probability of appearing when the variation pattern is a sliding big hit There are provided a mini character (fifth mini character) and a mini character (sixth mini character) that can appear with a high probability when the variation pattern is intro.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the first mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the first mini character is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of big hit. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the first mini character notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-1 for determining the first mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the second mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the second mini character is provided with a table for “other than development chance” and a table for “expansion chance”. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the second mini-character notice effect is higher in the case of “the development chance” than in the case of “other than the development opportunity”. In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-2 for determining the second mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the third mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the third mini character is provided with a table for “other than pseudo-ream” and a table for “pseudo-ream”. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”. Note that the determination value is set such that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the third mini-character notice effect is higher in the “pseudo-ream” than in the “non-pseudo-ream”. In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-3 for determining the third mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the third mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the third mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the fourth mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the fourth mini character is divided into a table at the time of “probable change”, a table at the time of “normal big hit”, and a table at the time of “off”. Is provided. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”. It should be noted that since the determination value is not assigned to “appearance” at the time of “ordinary big hit”, the fourth mini character does not appear when the normal big hit occurs. In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the fourth mini character notice determination random number SR9-4, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the fourth mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the fourth mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the fifth mini character notice setting table for determining the presence / absence of the fifth mini character is provided with a table other than “sliding”, a table when “slipping out”, and a table when “sliding big hit”. ing. In these mini character notice setting tables, the notice effect “none”, the mini character notice effect “appearance”, and the mini character notice effect “premiere appearance” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none”, “appearance”, and “premier appearance”, respectively. “Premier appearance” means that the aspect in which the fifth mini character appears is a special aspect different from the case of “appearance”. For example, if the mode in which butterflies that are the fifth mini characters fly on the screen of the effect display device 9 is “appearance”, the mode in which a large group of butterflies fly is “premier appearance”. Since a determination value is not assigned to “Premier Appearance” when it is other than “Slip Bonus”, the fifth mini character does not appear when it is other than “Slip Jackpot”. In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-5 for determining the fifth mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the fifth mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the fifth mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“None”, “Appearance”, “Premier Appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. .

  In addition, the sixth mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the sixth mini character is provided with a table for “other than intro” and a table for “intro”. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the sixth mini character notice effect is higher in the case of “intro” than in the case of “other than intro”. In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-6 for determining the sixth mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the sixth mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the sixth mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. In this embodiment, when the variation pattern executes “intro” as a specific effect, the second step-up notice is executed with a probability of 100%.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect using the effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 98 (step S587). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the production blade role announcement effect are determined using the production blade role advance notice setting table. Determine the content of the object notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect blade role notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect blade features 79a and 79b at a predetermined timing. In other words, the production blade accessory notice production is not a notice production in which the production blade actors 79a and 79b are operated once or a plurality of times. The specific details of the effect feather notice announcement will be omitted.

  The effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 98 is provided with a table for losing and a table for jackpot. In each effect blade accessory notice setting table, the notice effect “None” and the effect blade accessory notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the effect blade accompaniment notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S587, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-7 for determining the effect blade accessory notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the effect blade accessory notice setting table. To do. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect is determined.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect can be combined (step S588).

  In this embodiment, it is prohibited to simultaneously execute the notice effect D in the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice effect. Because, in this embodiment, when the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice effect is executed, the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. Is expanded to the entire area so that a full screen display is made. At this time, the notice effect “first step-up notice effect” executed in the first system notice area at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. D ”cannot be executed (the character corresponding to the notice effect D cannot appear on the display screen). Therefore, when the production mode “A → B → C → D” is determined as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, the production “X → Y → Z” is produced as the production mode of the second step-up notice production. The mode should not be determined.

  As described above, when the notice effect D in the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice effect are executed simultaneously, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined. (N in step S588). And the process which changes (rewrites) the production | generation aspect of a 1st step-up notice effect, for example to "D-> C" etc. which lowered step up by the predetermined step is performed (step S589). When it is determined that the combination is impossible, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect to, for example, an effect mode “Z → Y” in which the step-up is lowered by one or more steps is executed. You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication of two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and notice by executing two notice effects simultaneously on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a combination of the second step-up notice effect and the mail notice effect and a combination of the second step-up notice effect and the card notice effect are possible (step S590). . In this embodiment, since the second step-up notice effect, the e-mail notice effect, and the card notice effect are all executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9, the step-up notice effect and other notice effects (e-mail) This is because there may occur a case where the notice effect and the card notice effect) cannot be executed simultaneously.

  Specifically, the e-mail notice effect or the card notice effect cannot be executed during the period in which the effect that the screen is turned off during the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice effect is executed. Therefore, when the effect that the screen turns off during the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice effect and the mail notice effect or the card notice effect overlap, it is determined that the combination is impossible. If it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in Step S590), the screen displays the notice effect Y (off) that does not execute the mail notice effect or the card notice effect or turns off the screen in the first step-up notice effect. A process of changing (rewriting) the notice effect Y to be turned off is executed (step S591).

  Note that the execution period of the notice effect Y (turns off) and the execution period of the other system liquid crystal notice effect do not overlap, so in step S590, it is possible to combine the second step-up notice effect and the other system liquid crystal notice effect. Does not judge. Moreover, since the movable object notice effect is executed by moving the movable member 78 around the effect display device 9, a step-up notice executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9 at any timing. It can be performed simultaneously with production. Therefore, the movable object notice effect can be combined with any effect form in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. Therefore, in step S590, it is not determined whether or not the combination of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the movable object step-up notice effect is possible.

  The presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect aspect determined as described above are stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (notice effect storage area) of the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (step S845).

  Next, in step S845, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) is executed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data or the like). Is confirmed (step S846). When the step-up notice effect is being executed (Y in step S846), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the switching timing of the step-up notice effect based on the contents of the process data (step S847). If it is the step-up notice effect switching timing (Y in step S847), the effect control CPU 101 follows the contents of the process data (particularly, display control execution data including the notice effect, lamp control execution data, and movable member control data). The step-up notice effect is switched (changed, developed) (step S848).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 can be operated (button effective period) (step S849). The operation button 120 is effective when the notice effects E and F and the mail notice effect in the first step-up notice effect are being executed. When the button is valid (Y in step S849), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of detecting whether or not the operation button 120 is turned on (pressed) (step S850). The on state of the operation button 120 is detected by inputting an on signal from the operation button 120. When the effect control CPU 101 detects that the operation button 120 is turned on (Y in step S850), the effect control CPU 101 executes an effect corresponding to the operation button 120 being turned on in the set button notice effect (notice effect E, F, email notice). (Step S851).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect (movable object step-up notice effect) based on the contents of the process data (movable member control data and the like) (step S852). If it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect (Y in step S852), the movable member notice effect is executed by operating the movable member 78 in accordance with the contents of the process data (particularly, movable member control data) (step S853).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the other notice effects (frame notice effect, mini character notice effect, effect blade accessory notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) based on the contents of the process data. (Step S854). If it is the execution timing of the other notice effect (Y in step S854), the other notice effect is executed according to the contents of the process data (step S855). That is, the frame lamp 28 is turned on in a predetermined lighting pattern, a mini character image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing, the effect blades 79a and 79b are operated, the effect display device 9 An image (an image of another system) different from an image used for other effects is displayed on the screen.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the design confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop fluctuation.For example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern including the effect of “pseudo ream” (non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PB3-4, super PB3-5, super PA4-4, Super PA4-5, Super PA4-9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Special In the case of executing the processing of steps S841 to S845 based on PG1-3 to 1-5 and special PH1-3 to 1-5), as described above, a plurality of pseudo fluctuations of the effect symbol are executed. In this way, the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. In other words, the effect control data indicating the effect of the pseudo-continuous is also set in the process table corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation pattern.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects will be described. FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of various notice effects. As shown in FIG. 101, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the mail notice (a kind of button notice), the card notice, the other system liquid crystal notice, and the mini character notice are images displayed on the effect display device 9. Since these are notices to be used, these notices are called liquid crystal notices.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the first step-up notice is a main step-up notice (“A → B →”) that steps up in the order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), and step (D). C → D ”) and branch step up notice (“ A → E → F ”branching to branch step (E) without going from step (A) to step (B) and then to step (F) )), The process proceeds from step (A) to step (B), branches to step (G) in the middle of step (B), and then branches to step up notice ("A → B (on the way) → G → H ”), the process proceeds from step (A) to step (B), branches to step (G) in the middle of step (B), and further branches to step (I). Branch step up And a notice ( "A → B (middle) → G → I"). Here, steps (A) to (I) indicate the stage (period) in which the notice effects A to I are being executed.

  In this embodiment, the branching step (F) is a step (button notice) executed in response to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the operation button 120 during the execution of the step (E), the process proceeds to the step (F) to open a predetermined effect (the box shown in FIGS. 71, 74, etc.). Production to show the contents).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the second step-up notice shifts from the step (X) to the suggestion effect, branches to the branch step (Y) in the middle of the suggestion effect, and then shifts to the step (Z). Step-up advance notice (“X → Suggesting effect → Y → Z”), the process proceeds from Step (X) to the suggestion effect, branches to the branch step (Y) in the middle of the suggestion effect, and in the middle of the branch step (Y) The screen is turned off, and a step-up advance notice (“X → impact presentation → Y (screen turned off) → Z”) that shifts to step (Z) after the screen is turned off is provided. Here, steps (X), (Y), and (Z) indicate stages (periods) in which the notice effects X, Y, and Z are being executed.

  In this embodiment, after the step (X) is executed, the suggestive effect is always executed. The suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that step (Y) is executed after step (X) is executed, and specifically, the display screen of effect display device 9 gradually disappears. Production. Since the suggestion effect has a function of leaving the afterglow of the executed step (X), the suggestion effect is also referred to as an afterglow display.

  101 notifies the player that the mail has been received, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, opens the mail according to the operation of the player's operation button 120, and The contents (message shown in FIG. 89 and the like) are notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the contents of the mail.

  Further, in the card notice effect shown in FIG. 101, after the card is displayed, the contents (message shown in FIG. 93, etc.) automatically written on the card are automatically notified, and the probability of a big hit is high or low depending on the contents. Recognize

  In this manner, the mail notice effect is a notice effect (button notice effect) that displays a message (such as “...” “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 89 or the like) in accordance with the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 120 by the player. On the other hand, the card advance notice effect is a notice that automatically displays a message (such as “...” “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 93, etc.) without depending on the operation (depression) of the operation button 120 by the player. Production. In addition, the effect which displays a photographed image (moving image) in the effect display apparatus 9 is performed after execution of the card notice effect.

  In addition, the other system liquid crystal notice shown in FIG. 101 may be a big hit by displaying a predetermined image (an image different from the image displayed in the other liquid crystal notice) on the screen of the effect display device 9. Is recognized by the player.

  In addition, the mini character notice shown in FIG. 101 causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the mini character to appear on the screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, skipping the butterfly) at the start of the change of the effect symbol. . As described above, there are six types of mini characters.

  Also, the movable object notice shown in FIG. 101 makes the player recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing the moving image mode of the movable member 78 step by step. As described above, the movable object notice is a step-up notice effect (movable object step-up notice effect) in which the movable member 78 operates for each of steps K, L, and M.

  In addition, the effect feather role notice effect shown in FIG. 101 is that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the effect blade role 79a, 79b to operate (activate) at three times during the change of the effect symbol. Make people aware. In this embodiment, when the effect blades 79a and 79b are operated, a light emitter (not shown in FIGS. 1 and 3) such as a light emitting diode built in the effect blades 79a and 79b is caused to emit light. Production (light effect) is performed. In this embodiment, the effect blade bonus notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but may be a step-up notice effect. For example, the operation of the first effect blade accessory 79a, 79b in the effect blade accessory notice effect is set as step (P), and the operation of the second effect blade accessory 79a, 79b is set as step (Q). The operation of the effect blades 79a and 79b is defined as step (R). And the production | generation aspect which complete | finishes at step (P), the production | generation aspect which transfers to step (Q) after execution of step (P), it transfers to step (Q) after execution of step (P), and then step (R) ) To provide a production mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify step by step of the possibility of a big hit even by the effect blade accessory notice effect.

  In addition, the frame notice effect (frame flash notice effect) shown in FIG. 101 causes the player to recognize the possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern at the time of normal fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 101, the frame notice effect is executed not only when the change of the effect symbol starts but also when the button notice (email notice) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 101, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be started simultaneously with the start of the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. . Of the plurality of notice effects, the first step up notice effect, the mail notice effect, the card notice effect, the other system liquid crystal notice effect, the movable object notice effect (movable object step up notice effect), and the production blade feature notice effect ( The feather mono notice effect) is a notice effect that can be executed at the time when the change in the design symbol is shifted to the high-speed change. Among the plurality of notice effects, the second step-up notice effect and the movable object notice effect are notice effects that can be executed at a time after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change of the effect design to the high speed change. ing. Further, among the plurality of notice effects, the second step up notice effect is a notice effect that can be started during the time when the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol is being executed (timing later than the first step up notice effect, etc.) Has been.

  Thus, since the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started at different timings, it can be expected whether or not the notice is started for each of the plurality of step-up notice effects. . That is, if the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started at the same timing, when neither the first step-up notice effect nor the second step-up notice effect is started at that timing, There is a risk that the big hit expectation will not be expected and the interest of the game will be reduced. However, if the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are configured to start at different timings, Even if the step-up notice effect is not started, an expectation that the second step-up notice effect may be started can be given, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, among the plurality of notice effects, the start timing of the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash), the start timing of the first step up notice effect, etc., and the second step up notice effect and the start of the movable object notice effect Since the timing is different from each other, the player can be expected to see whether or not the notice effect is started at three start timings, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 101, the first step-up notice effect is started first, and then the second step-up notice effect is started, but the reverse may be possible. That is, the second step-up notice effect may be started first, and then the first step-up notice effect may be started thereafter. In addition, the start timing of the notice effect other than the step-up notice effect is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 101 and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 101, symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol. When “chance eye” is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed after the middle symbol aori effect (the effect of whether or not the middle symbol stops at the symbol that constitutes the chance eye) is performed. Is done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 101, the following effects are performed as the slip effects. For example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, the character appears, and after the right symbol is re-variable, the right symbol is changed and then the effect display (character sliding) is performed. In addition, after temporarily displaying the left symbol and the right symbol, the effect feather actors 79a and 79b are operated, and after the left symbol, the right symbol, and the left and right symbols are changed again, the temporary stop symbol is displayed. An effect display to be changed (effect blade actuating sliding) is performed. In addition, after the left symbol and right symbol are temporarily stopped, the left symbol, right symbol, or left and right symbols are changed again according to the stop of the left symbol, right symbol, or left and right symbols. The effect display (specific symbol stop slip) for changing the temporary stop symbol is performed by displaying the stop symbol after stopping.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed. Without execution, the process proceeds to step S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 has set a confirmation command reception flag indicating that an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S871). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-line symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on that, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the jackpot display symbol is not displayed in the processing of step S872 (that is, when the loss symbol is displayed), the effect control CPU 101 waits for the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). The value is updated in accordance with (Step S874).

  When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S872, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876), and receives a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S876). Whether or not a big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or a sudden hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a sudden hit start designation command has been received is set (step S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the sudden start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878) and selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect. (Step S879).

  When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the sudden start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag. In the process of step S879, the effect control CPU 101 selects the process table corresponding to the “15-time open game start notification” shown in FIG. When the big hit is determined, the process table corresponding to the “twice-open game start notification (dedicated to surprise)” shown in FIG. 60 is selected. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control) In accordance with data 1, the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable member 78 as production component and production blade accessory 79a, 79b ) Is executed (step S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S882).

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects will be described.

  First, the main step up (notification effects AD) in the first step up notice will be described. FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing the notice timing when notice effects A to D are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 103 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B → C → D is executed as a first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 103, the left symbol is stopped and the right symbol is stopped while the notice effect C is being executed, and the reach effect is executed after the notice effect D is executed.

  FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when notice effects A to D are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 104, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 104 (10-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. In the first system notice area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (see the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9: see FIG. 112) As the notice effect A in the first step-up notice, an effect in which the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen is executed (10-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (10-3). Thereafter, the character B211 goes to the right side of the screen. Next, an effect in which the character C212 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (10-4). Thereafter, the character C212 leaves on the right side of the screen.

  Thereafter, an effect in which the characters A210, B211 and C212 appear from the left side of the screen at the same time as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed, and the right symbol (“7”) is stopped to generate reach (10-5). ).

  The effect as described above is the notice effect of the main step up in the first step up notice.

  Next, the first branch step-up (notice effects E and F) in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 105 is a timing chart showing the notice timing when notice effects A, E, and F are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 105 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → E → F is executed as a first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 105, the left symbol is stopped while the notice effect F is being executed, and then the right symbol is stopped and the reach effect is executed.

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the notice effects A, B, E, and F are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 106, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 106 (11-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation, and the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen as the announcement production A in the first step-up announcement in the first system announcement area of the display screen of the production display device 9. An effect to be executed is executed (11-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, the box image 300 and the operation button image 310 are displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 without performing the effect in which the character B211 corresponding to the notice effect B in the first step-up notice appears. The effect to perform is executed (11-3). This effect corresponds to the notice effect E (branch step E) in the first branch step-up. By executing the notice effect E, the player is prompted to operate the operation button 120.

  When the player operates the operation button 120, the box image 300 is opened, and an effect is shown to show that a gold ingot is contained in the box, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (11−). 5). This effect corresponds to the notice effect F (branch step F) in the first branch step-up. It should be noted that the items in the box are not limited to displaying gold ingots, but display any one of a plurality of types of items (for example, items such as jewels and bills) depending on the type of reach and the reliability of the jackpot. It may be. Moreover, you may make it alert | report that nothing is in the box (it is empty) according to the kind of reach and the reliability of jackpot. In such a configuration, it is necessary to perform processing for selecting the contents of the box according to the type of reach and the reliability of the jackpot.

  Thereafter, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs (11-5).

  The effects as described above are the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up.

  Next, the second branch step-up (notice effects G and H) in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 107 is a timing chart showing the notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and H are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 107 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B → G → H is executed as a first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 107, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach effect is executed while the notice effect H is being executed.

  FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the notice effects A, G, and H are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 108, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 108 (12-1)), when the start condition is satisfied, The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation, and the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen as the announcement production A in the first step-up announcement in the first system announcement area of the display screen of the production display device 9. An effect to be executed is executed (12-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (12-3). Then, during the execution of the notice effect B (that is, before the character B211 is moved to the right of the screen), an effect in which a sound such as “go-go-go” is played is executed (12-4). This effect corresponds to the notice effect G (branch step G) in the second branch step-up.

  Then, an effect that an earthquake occurs and the ground shakes and the ground breaks is executed (12-5). This effect corresponds to the notice effect H1 (branch step H1) in the second branch step-up. The left symbol (“7”) is stopped during the announcement effect H1. After that, “Mole” comes out of the ground and the production “It ’s super reach!” Is executed (12-6). This effect corresponds to the notice effect H2 (branch step H2) in the second branch step-up. During execution of the notice effect H2, the right symbol ("7") is stopped and the reach effect is executed.

  The effects as described above are the notice effects G, H1, and H2 in the second branch step-up.

  Next, the second branch step-up (notification effects G and I) in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 109 is a timing diagram showing the notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and I are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 109 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B → G → I is executed as a first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 109, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach effect is executed during the notice effect I.

  FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the notice effects A, G, and I are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 110, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 110 (13-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation, and the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen as the announcement production A in the first step-up announcement in the first system announcement area of the display screen of the production display device 9. The effect to perform is executed (13-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (13-3). Then, during the execution of the notice effect B (that is, before the character B211 is left on the right side of the screen), an effect in which a sound such as “Go Go Go” is played is executed (13-4). This effect corresponds to the notice effect G (branch step G) in the second branch step-up.

  Then, the effect of generating lightning is executed (13-5). This effect corresponds to the notice effect I1 (branch step I1) in the second branch step-up. The left symbol (“7”) is stopped during the execution of the notice effect I1. Thereafter, an effect that displays “Chance!” Is executed (13-6). This effect corresponds to the notice effect I2 (branch step I2) in the second branch step-up. During execution of the notice effect I2, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and the reach effect is executed.

  The effects as described above are the notice effects G, I1, and I2 in the second branch step-up.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first step-up notice effect includes a step-by-step notice effect, a main step-up notice that can execute the notice effects AD, and this main step-up notice. There is a possibility that a big hit will occur depending on the operation of the operation button 120 by the player without changing to the next stage notice effect (the notice effect B in the above embodiment) in the middle of the execution. Since it includes the branch step-up notice effect that branches to the notice effect E and F (operation notice effect) to be notified, the step-up notice effect can be provided with variations (diversity), and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be planned. Further, since the notice effect after branching is the operation notice effect, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 changes to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect when it is determined to be a big hit, and the effect that the notice ends without changing to the notice effect C (“A → B”). ) Is selected (reliability “about 0.3819” in the case of “Step B” shown in FIG. 87), the notice effect B is not changed after the notice effect A is executed in the branch step-up notice effect. The selection ratio (“Step E, F” shown in FIG. 87 is “Reliability“ Using the first notice setting table set so as to be higher about 0.4124 "), the aspect of the effect in the first step-up notice effect is determined. According to such a configuration, the branch step-up notice effect (notice effects E and F) is executed in the main step-up notice effect rather than the case where the notice effect B is executed next to the notice effect A. Since the possibility of a big hit is higher, the player operates the operation means with great expectation when the player branches off, and can further improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 replaces the notice effect B with the notice effect B at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect. ) Is executed, the player does not know which notice effect (the notice effect B, the notice effect E, F) changes from the notice effect A, and improves the interest of the game. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect includes a special step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) different from the main step-up notice effect and the branch step-up notice effect. As the step-up notice effect, the main step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) are configured so that they can be executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display. It is possible to improve the interest by simultaneously executing the notice effects (main step-up notice effect and special step-up notice effect).

  In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for variation pattern type determination based on the determination result of whether or not to reach the jackpot determination determination result, and the variation A variation pattern is determined from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type using a random number for pattern determination. Then, if it is determined to be reach, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state, and a variation pattern with a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type according to the reach state is determined. Decide either. Further, when it is determined not to reach, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern according to the non-reach state is determined, and the plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type according to the non-reach state are accompanied. Determine any of the fluctuation patterns. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects not only when reaching the reach state but also when not reaching the reach state without increasing the program capacity.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 101 is determined to be a big hit, the notice effects E and F (operation notice effects) are executed without changing to the notice effect B after the notice effect A is executed in the branch step-up notice effect. In the main step-up advance notice effect, the selection ratio (the reliability “about 0.4124” in the case of “Step E, F” shown in FIG. 87) in which the effect mode (“A → E → F”) is selected is selected. The selection rate (“A → B → C”) of the effect that changes to the notice effect B and further changes to the notice effect C (the reliability in the case of “step C” shown in FIG. 87 is “about 1. 8934 ") is set so as to be higher, and the aspect of the effect in the first step-up notice effect is determined using the first notice setting table. According to such a configuration, the possibility of a big hit is higher when the main step-up notice effect is executed up to the notice effect C than when the branch step-up notice effect (notice effects E and F) is executed. Therefore, the player has greater expectations for the continuation (step-up) of the main step-up notice effect than branching to the branch step-up notice effect, and can maintain a sense of expectation over a long period of time, It is possible to further improve the interest of games.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to branch to the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up notice effect at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect. The player can expect to change to the notice effect B at the same timing and continue or branch to the notice effects E and F at the same time, and can further improve the interest. In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to branch to the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up notice effect at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect. However, it may be configured to branch to the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up notice effect at the same timing as the timing of changing from the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect to the notice effect C. Also, the notice effects E, F or the notice effects G, H, and I at the same timing as the change timing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B or the change timing from the notice effect B to the notice effect C in the main step-up notice effect. It is also possible to branch to at least one branch notice effect.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to branch to the notice effect G in the branch step up at a timing during which the notice effect B in the main step up notice effect is being executed. During the execution of the notice effect B in the notice effect, not only the transition to the next notice effect C can be expected, but also the transition (branch) to the notice effect G in the branch step-up can be expected. Can be achieved. In addition, you may make it branch to the notice effect E and F (1st branch notice effect) in the timing in the middle of performing the notice effect A in the main step-up notice effect. In addition, the notice effect E, F (first branch notice effect) or notice effect G, H, I (second branch notice effect) at the timing when the notice effect A or the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect is being executed. ) May be branched to at least one branch notice effect.

  The first step-up notice effect is a main step-up notice effect and a first branch timing (a timing when the notice step effect A changes to the notice effect B), which is a stage in the middle of the execution of the main step-up notice effect. First branch step for branching to different notice systems E and F (first branch notice effects) different from the notice effects A to D included in the main step-up notice effect without changing to the next stage notice effect B Up notice effect C and the next stage notice effect C at the second branch timing after the first branch timing (timing during the notice effect B being executed), which is the stage in the middle of executing the main step up notice effect Without changing to, the notice effect G, H or G, I (second minute) of a different system different from the notice effects A to D included in the main step-up notice effect The second branch step-up notice effect that branches to the notice effect) can be included, so that the variation of the notice effect can be increased, and the player can be interested in the branch step-up notice effect. Improvements can be made.

  Further, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 101 is a big hit, the selection ratio (FIG. 87) in which the effect mode (“A → E → F”) in which the first branch step-up notice effect is executed is selected. The mode of the effect in which the second branch step-up notice effect is executed (“A → B → G → H or A → B → G”) than the reliability “about 0.4124” in the case of the branch steps E and F shown. → The selection ratio at which I) is selected (reliability “about 2.8516” in the case of branch steps G and H shown in FIG. 87 or reliability “about 5.1464” in the case of branch steps G and I) Since the first notice setting table is set so as to be higher, the effect of the effect in the first step-up notice effect is determined. Jackpot trust Because of the high, it is possible to maintain the expectation for that branch long time, can be improved even more interest.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 branches to the notice effects E and F (first branch notice effect) at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step up notice effect, and the main step up notice effect. Is divided into the notice effects G, H, and I (second branch notice effect) at a timing during the execution of the notice effect B. According to such a configuration, there are a plurality of branch timings branched from the main step-up notice effect, and the branch timing is synchronized with the change timing (switching timing) of the notice effect in the main step-up notice effect, and the main step-up notice. Since there is a case where the notice effect in the effect is being executed, the player can expect to change to the notice effect B at the same timing and continue or branch to the notice effects E and F at the same time. At the same time, during the execution of the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect, not only the transition to the next notice effect C can be expected, but also the transition (branch) to the notice effect G in the branch step up can be expected. Further enhancement of interest can be achieved. It should be noted that at the timing when the notice effect A in the main step-up notice effect is being executed, it is branched to the notice effects E and F (first branch notice effect), and from the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect to the notice effect C. The notice effects G, H, and I (second branch notice effect) may be branched at the same timing as the change timing. That is, the notice effects E, F (first branch notice effect) or the notice effect at the same timing as the change timing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B or the change timing from the notice effect B to the notice effect C in the main step-up notice effect. Branch to any one of G, H, and I (second branch notice effect), and notice effect at a timing during which notice effect A or notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect is being executed You may make it branch to the other branch notice effect of E, F (1st branch notice effect) or notice effect G, H, I (2nd branch notice effect).

  In addition, the first step-up notice effect is the main step-up notice effect without changing to the next step notice effect (notice effect B) in the middle of the execution of the main step-up notice effect. The branch step-up notice effect that branches to the notice effects G, H (branch notice effect) of a different system different from the notice effects A to D included in the notice effect, and the stage during the branch step-up notice effect is being executed Special branch step-up notice effect branching to a different notice system I (special branch notice effect) different from the branch notice effect G, H included in the branch step-up notice effect without changing to the next stage notice effect H As a result, the variation of the notice production becomes abundant, and you can be interested in the branch of the step-up notice production. It is possible to improve the flavor.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
Hereinafter, a second embodiment which is a modification of the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice and the contents of each notice effect in the second step-up notice in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice and the contents of each notice effect in the second step-up notice in the second embodiment. The first step notice (right step-up notice) includes five notice effects (notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D, and notice effect E). As shown in FIG. 111, as a notice effect A, a person character A appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 (see FIG. 112) of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen. Is done. As the notice effect B, an effect in which a human character B appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect C, an effect in which a human character C appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect D, characters A, B, and C simultaneously appear from the left of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and stop at the center of the screen. As the notice effect E, the effect that a large human character D appears from the right side of the screen where the characters A, B, and C are gathered in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  The second step notice (left step-up notice) includes four notice effects (notice effect W, notice effect X, notice effect Y1, and notice effect Z1). In FIG. 111, the notice effects Y2 and Y3 and the notice effects Z2 and Z3 are not shown. As shown in FIG. 111, as the notice effect W, the effect that the beetle character flies from the right side of the screen in the second system notice area 92 (see FIG. 112) of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect X, an effect in which the beetle character stays on the tree in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Y1, an effect in which the wind blows in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the tree shakes is performed. As the notice effect Z1, the effect that the seagull flies in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second system notice area is enlarged and displayed at the change timing of the second step-up notice effect. As shown in FIG. 112, in this embodiment, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first step-up notice (first system step-up notice) is displayed in the display area at the bottom of the display screen (this is the first system). The second step-up advance notice (second system step-up advance notice) is executed in the display area at the top of the display screen (area for displaying the background image). As shown in FIG. 112, when a predetermined effect in the second step-up notice (specifically, notice effects W, X, Y1, Z1) is executed, the second system notice area 92 is a small display area. However, when a specific effect (specifically, the notice effects Y2 and Z2) is executed, the second system notice area 92 is enlarged to become a large display area in order to emphasize the second step-up notice. Note that when the second system notice area 92 is enlarged, the first system notice area 91 is slightly reduced. However, even when the second system notice area 92 is enlarged, the first system notice area 91 may not be reduced.

  FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged display mode (pattern) of the second system notice area. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second system notice area is enlarged and displayed at a plurality of types of change timings of the second step-up notice effect. As shown in FIG. 113, in the second step-up notice, the pattern changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z1), and from step (X) to step (Z A pattern that changes from step (Y2) to step (Z2), a pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y1), and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z2) , A pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y3), then changes from step (Y3) to step (Z3), and changes from step (X) to step (Y1), then from step (Y1) to step (Y1) The pattern changes to (Z3), and changes from step (X) to step (Y2), and then from step (Y2) to step (Y2). And a, a pattern that varies (Z3).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 114, in the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z1), the second system notice area 92 is not enlarged. In the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y2) and then changes from step (Y2) to step (Z2), the second system notice area 92 is enlarged (large) when step (Y2) is executed. (The middle display area), and when the step (Z2) is executed, the second system notice area 92 remains enlarged. In the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z2), the second system notice area 92 is expanded when step (Z2) is executed ( (It becomes the display area of medium size). In a pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y3) and then changes from step (Y3) to step (Z3), the second system notice area 92 is displayed in full screen when step (Y3) is executed. (It becomes a display area of size (large)), and when the step (Z3) is executed, the second system notice area 92 remains in full screen display.

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 114, in the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z3), when step (Z3) is executed. The second system notice area 92 is displayed in full screen (a display area of size (large)). In the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y2) and then changes from step (Y2) to step (Z3), the second system notice area 92 is enlarged (large) when step (Y2) is executed. When the step (Z3) is executed, the second system notice area 92 is displayed in full screen (is a large (large) display area).

  115 and 116 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting processing in the second embodiment. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to a non-reach deviation variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) has been received as a variation pattern command (step S571). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach shift pattern is received (Y in step S571), the first step up is performed using the first advance setting table for non-reach shift shown in the upper left of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the notice effect is determined (step S572).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect refers to a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit) is used, the ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step up to a higher stage in the step-up notice effect is higher than when the specific display result is not used. .

  Note that the step-up notice effect may be such that the shape and color of one character changes, and the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player changes stepwise. If it can be recognized as “step-up notice”, it can be said. For example, the number of characters increases stepwise, the number of characters that move stepwise, the number of times the character moves, the frequency, etc. increase stepwise, and the character size increases stepwise. May be. The same applies when the character is replaced with a movable member. That is, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the number of movable members that move stepwise may be increased, or the number of times and the frequency of movement of the movable member may increase stepwise.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 112, FIG. 129, etc.), the content of the first step-up notice effect is the display area at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (first system notice area 91). In step 1, the characters (human characters) are made to appear in stages. Detailed contents of the first step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the first non-reach shift notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 117, the notice effect “None”, the effect form in which only the notice effect A is executed (the development pattern of “A”), and the notice effect A are executed. The effect mode (the development pattern “A → B”) in which the notice effect B is executed after the event, and the effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed ( “A → B → C” development pattern) and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (“A → B → C → D”). Development pattern), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice pattern B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are executed in order (an extension pattern “A → B → C → D → E”). ) And are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode. The same applies to the other tables (FIGS. 118 to 121).

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 117, “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, and “A → B → C → D → E”. On the other hand, no judgment value is assigned (the number of judgment values is 0). This is to prevent the occurrence of the advance notice effect C or higher when the reach does not occur, that is, to determine the occurrence of reach when the effect of the advance notice effect C or higher appears.

  In step S572, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR8-1 (the random number update range shown in FIG. 46 is different), and the extracted random number value and the first notice setting table. Compare with the judgment value set in. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S572, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. Contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S573).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 112, FIG. 129, etc.), the content of the second step-up notice effect is the display area at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (second system notice area 92). The background image is gradually changed (developed and converted). Detailed contents of the second step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  118, the notice effect “None”, the effect form in which only the notice effect W is executed (the development pattern of “W”), and the notice effect W are executed. After the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “W → X”), the notice effect X is executed after the notice effect W is executed, and then the notice effect Y1 is executed ( The development pattern of “W → X → Y1”) and the presentation pattern in which the notice effect X is executed after the notice effect W is executed, and then the notice effect Y2 is executed (the development pattern of “W → X → Y2”). ), After the notice effect W is executed, the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Y3 is executed (the development pattern of “W → X → Y3”), and the notice effect W is executed. Notice effect X, notice effect Y1, notice An effect mode (development pattern of “W → X → Y1 → Z1”) in which the output Z1 is executed in order, and an effect in which the notice effect X, the notice effect Y2, and the notice effect Z2 are executed in order after the notice effect W is executed. A mode (an extension pattern of “W → X → Y2 → Z2”) and an effect mode (“W → X → Y1” in which the notice effect X, the notice effect Y1, and the notice effect Z2 are sequentially executed after the notice effect W is executed. → Z2 ”development pattern), and after the notice effect W is executed, the notice effect X, the notice effect Y3, and the notice effect Z3 are executed in order (the development pattern“ W → X → Y3 → Z3 ”). After the notice effect W is executed, the notice effect X, the notice effect Y1, and the notice effect Z3 are executed in order (the development pattern of “W → X → Y1 → Z3”), and the notice effect W is executed. Notice effect X, notice effect Y2, notice effect Z But the director embodiment, which is performed in the order (the development pattern of "W → X → Y2 → Z3"), has been set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S573, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice (the update range of the random number shown in FIG. 46 is different), and the extracted random number value and the second notice setting table. Compare with the judgment value set in. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S571, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern is not received (N in step S571), the normal reach CPU 101 receives the command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern. Whether or not (step S574). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation is received (Y in step S574), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect are determined (step S575).

  117. The first advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 117 has the same contents as the first advance notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 117. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In addition, in the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 117, determination values are not assigned to “A → B → C → D” and “A → B → C → D → E”. (The number of judgment values is 0). This is for the purpose of determining the occurrence of super reach when an effect greater than the notice effect D appears.

  In step S575, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S575, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 118 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S576).

  In the second reach setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 118, the same effect forms as the second notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 118 are set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S576, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S574, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the normal reach has not been received (N in step S574), the CPU for effect control 101 has received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the super reach. Whether or not (step S577). If it is determined that a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation has been received (Y in step S577), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for super reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Then, the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect is determined (step S578).

  117 is the first advance notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 117 and the first advance notice setting table for deviation of normal reach shown in the upper right of FIG. 117. Are produced, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S578, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  Further, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S578, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for super reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 118 to perform the second step-up notice effect. Contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S579).

  118, the second advance notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 118 and the second advance notice setting table for deviation of normal reach shown in the upper right of FIG. Are produced, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S579, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  If it is determined in step S577 that the effect control CPU 101 has not received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from super reach (N in step S577), it is determined that the command corresponding to the big hit fluctuation pattern has been received. The contents of the first step-up notice effect (presence / effect type) are determined using the jackpot first notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 117 (step S580).

  117 has the same contents as the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation, normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper left, upper right and lower left of FIG. 117. A production mode is set, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S580, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  Further, after determining the contents of the first step-up notice effect in step S580, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second jackpot second notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 118 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S581).

  The second jackpot setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 118 has the same contents as the second notice setting table for non-reach deviation, normal reach deviation, and super reach deviation shown in the upper left, upper right and lower left of FIG. A production mode is set, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In this embodiment, the presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode are determined in the same notice setting table (first notice setting table, The second notice setting table) is used. However, instead of using the same notice setting table for all jackpot types, there is a notice setting table that is used for each of the normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, and sudden probability variation jackpot, and steps using the notice setting table corresponding to the jackpot type The presence / absence of the up notice effect (first step up notice effect, second step up notice effect) and the effect mode may be determined. In this case, by changing the distribution of the judgment value for the notice effect in each notice setting table, it is possible to vary the execution ratio of the step-up notice and the appearance ratio of the effect mode according to the type of jackpot. For example, the probability variation jackpot is more interesting than the normal jackpot by setting a table so that patterns that continue to be stepped up such as “A → B → C → D → E” are easily selected. Improvement is achieved.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the movable object notice effect using the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 119 (step S582). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table, and the content of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit. .

  In this embodiment, the movable object notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit when the movable member 78 operates in a scheduled manner. That is, the movable object notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that the operating member 78 changes (develops and operates) one or more times stepwise). Detailed contents of the movable object notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 119, the notice member “None”, the effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the first notice timing, and the second notice timing (timing different from the first notice timing) are movable members. An effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the third notice timing (both the first notice timing and the second notice timing) is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S582, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the moving object notice (not shown in FIG. 46), and uses the extracted random number value and the determination value set in the movable object notice setting table. Compare. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “first notice timing”, “second notice timing”, “third notice timing”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value, the moving object notice effect is displayed. Presence / absence and production mode are determined.

  The content of the moving object notice effect is determined using the same big hit movable object notice setting table at the time of big hit, but multiple possible depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden sudden change big hit) An animal notice setting table may be provided, and the contents of the movable object notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, by changing the distribution value of each table according to the type of jackpot, the execution ratio of the movable object notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 120 to determine the contents (presence / absence, effect form) of the button notice effect (step S583). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents of the button notice effect (presence / absence, effect form) are determined using the button notice setting table, and the contents of the button notice effect are determined using the button notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the button notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but the possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player. It is an effect to notify that there is. That is, the button notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) one or more times stepwise in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120). Detailed contents of the button notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142.

  In the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 120, the notice effect “None”, the effect form in which the first mail notice effect (the mail notice effect in the first stage of opening the mail) is executed at the early timing, and the first mail at the later time are shown. An effect mode in which a notice effect (e-mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a second e-mail notice effect (e-mail notification effect in two stages of opening an email) is executed at an early timing, and a second e-mail notice effect at a later time An effect mode in which (mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a card notice effect (notice effect in which a card appears) is executed at an early timing, and an effect mode in which a card notice effect is executed at a later timing Is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S583, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for button notice determination (not shown in FIG. 46), and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the button notice setting table. To do. Then, the notice effect assigned to the determination value that matches the random value (“none”, “early timing in the first mail notice”, “late time in the first mail notice”, “early timing in the second mail notice”, The presence / absence of the button notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on “slow timing in the second mail notice”, “early timing in the card notice”, “late timing in the card notice”).

  In addition, at the time of a big hit, the content of the button notice effect is determined using the same big hit button notice setting table, but multiple button notice settings are made according to the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit) A table may be provided, and the content of the button notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, depending on the type of jackpot, by changing the distribution value of each table, it is possible to vary the execution ratio of the button notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of a frame (lamp) notice effect using the frame (lamp) notice setting table shown in FIG. 121 (step S584). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table, and the contents of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern. In other words, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) the lighting pattern step by step once or a plurality of times). The specific contents of the frame notice effect will be omitted.

  The frame notice setting table shown in FIG. 121 is provided with a table at the time of loss and a table at the time of a big hit. In each frame notice setting table, a notice effect “none” and a frame notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the frame advance notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-6 for determining the frame notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the frame notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the frame notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of a mini character notice effect using the mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 121 (step S585). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table, and the content of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the mini character notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a notification that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a mini character (an image of a character with a small size) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Production. That is, the mini character notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) a mini character step by step one or more times).

  The mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 121 is provided with a table for a loss and a table for a big hit. In each mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the mini character notice notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number for determining the mini character notice (not shown in FIG. 46), and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the mini character notice setting table. . Then, the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Note that a plurality of types of mini character notice effects may be provided, and when mini character notice execution (mini character appearance) is decided, it may be determined which mini character appears. A character that can appear only at the time of a big hit may be set as the type of mini character. In addition to the jackpot notice, the mini character is a notice that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit with probability fluctuation at the time of the jackpot, a notice that suggests whether or not the fluctuation will reach, a notice that suggests whether to become super reach, It is equipped with multiple character mini-notices with different targets to be notified, such as a notice suggesting whether a pseudo-ream or a slide effect will occur, and each system is selected based on the result of the big hit determination and the contents of the fluctuation pattern You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the distribution value in the table is changed depending on the case of outage and the case of big hit. However, mini-characters with different distribution values to be used in each of the big hit, the normal big hit, the normal big hit, and the sudden hit. A notice determination table may be provided, and the appearance and type of the mini character may be selected based on the tables. In this case, when a plurality of mini-characters are provided, a table may be provided for each system, and the appearance of each mini-character of the plurality of systems may be selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect using the effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 121 (step S586). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the production blade role announcement effect are determined using the production blade role advance notice setting table. Determine the content of the object notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect blade role notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect blade features 79a and 79b at a predetermined timing. In other words, the production blade accessory notice production is not a notice production in which the production blade actors 79a and 79b are operated once or a plurality of times. The specific details of the effect feather notice announcement will be omitted.

  121 has a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of big hit. In each effect blade accessory notice setting table, the notice effect “None” and the effect blade accessory notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the effect blade accompaniment notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-7 for determining the effect blade accessory notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the effect blade accessory notice setting table. To do. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the other system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 121 to determine whether or not another system liquid crystal notice effect (notice effect of another system different from other notices such as step-up notice and button notice). Determination is made (step S587). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The other system liquid crystal notice setting table is used to determine the content (presence / absence, production mode) of the other system liquid crystal notice setting. When the big hit, the other system liquid crystal notice setting table for the big hit is used. Determine the content.

  In this embodiment, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a predetermined image (an image of a character appearing in a step-up notice or an image displayed as a button notice, on the display screen of the effect display device 9). This is an effect of notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying an image different from the image of the mini character) at a predetermined timing. That is, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a notice effect that changes a predetermined image once or a plurality of times on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The specific contents of the other system liquid crystal notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140.

  The other-system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 121 is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of big hit. In each other system liquid crystal notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the other system liquid crystal notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. It should be noted that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the other system liquid crystal notice announcement effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S587, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-8 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the other system liquid crystal notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may be provided for each of the frame notice effect, the mini character notice effect, the effect blade accessory notice effect, and the other system liquid crystal notice effect. In that case, using the notice type random number that determines whether or not the notice effect is executed, the frame notice effect, the mini character notice effect, the wing feather notice effect, and the other system liquid crystal notice effect are decided, and then the notice is given. You may comprise so that the production | presentation aspect of each notification effect may be determined using the production | generation aspect determination random number which determines the production | presentation aspect (content) of production | presentation. According to such a configuration, even if the number of effect modes of the notice effect is large, there is no restriction on the relationship between the random number assigned to the effect mode of the notice effect and the number of effect modes of the notice effect. That is, if a certain notice effect A appears with a probability of 1/10000, a random number of 10000 is required, and if three effect forms (variations) of the notice effect A are provided, a random number of 30000 is required. If a random number is used to determine whether or not the notice effect A is to be executed, and if it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the effect form of the notice effect A is determined using the effect mode determining random number. Only the notice type random number and the production mode determining random number of 3 are sufficient. Such a configuration is not limited to the case of determining the frame notice effect, the mini character notice effect, the effect vane matter notice effect, and the other system liquid crystal notice effect, but also the first step up notice effect, the second step up notice effect, The present invention can also be applied when determining a moving object notice effect and a button notice effect.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect can be combined (step S588).

  Specifically, combinations shown in FIGS. 122 to 125 are conceivable as combinations of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. 122 to 125 are explanatory diagrams showing whether or not a combination of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice is possible.

  In this embodiment, as the first step-up notice effect effect form (development pattern), an effect form in which the notice effect changes twice (development in two stages) (an effect aspect of “A → B → C” or more) is executed. When this is done, the effect mode (“W → X → Y3” or “W → X → Y3 → Z3” effect mode in which the notice effect Y3 is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the second step-up notice effect ) Is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more in the first step-up notice effect and an effect form “W → X → Y3” or “W → X → Y3 → Z3” in the second step-up notice effect It is prohibited to run at the same time. This is because, in this embodiment, when the notice effect Y3 in the second step-up notice effect is executed, for example, as shown in (4-4) of FIG. 137, the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is displayed. Since the display is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first screen is executed in the first system notice area 91 at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. This is because the notice effect “C” of the step-up notice effect cannot be executed (a character corresponding to the notice effect C cannot appear on the display screen). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 123 and FIG. 125, when an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more is determined as the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is determined. The production mode of “W → X → Y3” or “W → X → Y3 → Z3” should not be determined.

  In addition, as an effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, an effect mode in which the notice effect changes three times (development in three stages) (an effect mode of “A → B → C → D” or more) is executed. When the second step-up notice effect is produced (developed pattern), the notice effect Z3 is executed (“W → X → Y3 → Z3”, “W → X → Y1 → Z3” or “W → X → Y2 → Z3 ”) is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C → D” or more in the first step-up notice effect, an effect form “W → X → Y3 → Z3”, and “W → X → Y1 →” in the second step-up notice effect. “Z3” or “W → X → Y2 → Z3” is prohibited from being executed simultaneously. This is because, in this embodiment, when the notice effect Z3 in the second step-up notice effect is executed, for example, as shown in (4-5) of FIG. 137, the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is displayed. Since the display is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first screen is executed in the first system notice area 91 at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. This is because the notice effect “D” of the step-up notice effect cannot be executed (a character corresponding to the notice effect D cannot appear on the display screen). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 125, when an effect mode of “A → B → C → D” or more is determined as the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, The production mode of “W → X → Y3 → Z3”, “W → X → Y1 → Z3” or “W → X → Y2 → Z3” should not be determined.

  As described above, as the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → C” or more than “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E ”) is determined, and the production mode“ W → X → Y3 ”and“ W → X → Y3 → Z3 ”are determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice production, and the first step-up notice production is performed. As an effect mode, an effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”) or more is determined as an effect mode, and the second step-up notice effect is produced. When the production modes “W → X → Y3 → Z3”, “W → X → Y1 → Z3”, and “W → X → Y2 → Z3” are determined as the modes, as shown in FIG. 123 and FIG. It is determined that the step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (step S58). Of N). Then, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect to, for example, “W → X” in which the step-up is lowered by a predetermined level is executed (step S589). When it is determined that the combination is impossible, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to, for example, an effect mode “A → B” in which the step-up is lowered by one or more steps is executed. You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication of two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and notice by executing two notice effects simultaneously on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  In this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes twice or more (develops two or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → When a production mode of “B → C” or more is executed, reach (normal reach, super reach) is always generated. Therefore, in the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation in the upper left of FIG. 117, no determination value is assigned to the production mode of “A → B → C” or more. For this reason, when reach does not occur (when a non-reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C” “A → B → C → D ”“ A → B → C → D → E ”) is not always determined.

  However, in the first notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 117, the reach determination effect modes (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”) are used. If it is set to allocate the determination value, it is determined in step S588 that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (the reach confirmation effect mode cannot be executed). Will do. In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B”) that is not reach determination is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes three times or more (development of three or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → When the production mode of “B → C → D” or more is executed, super reach is always generated. Accordingly, in the first notice setting table for deviation from the normal reach on the upper right in FIG. 117, no determination value is assigned to the production mode “A → B → C → D” or more. For this reason, when super reach does not occur (when a normal reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “ A → B → C → D → E ”) is not always determined.

  However, in the first notice setting table shown in the upper right of FIG. 117, a determination value is assigned to a super reach determination effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”). If set, it is determined in step S588 that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (it is impossible to execute the super reach determination effect mode). In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B → C”) that is not super reach determination is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 combines a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and a button notice effect, and a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, first It is determined whether or not the combination of the two-step-up notice effect) and the other system liquid crystal notice effect is possible (step S590). In this embodiment, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the button notice effect, and the other system liquid crystal notice effect are all executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9, so the step up This is because the notice effect and other notice effects (button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) may not be executed at the same time.

  As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the button notice effect (mail notice effect, card notice effect) executed at an early timing is combined with an arbitrary effect mode in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. Is possible. On the other hand, button notice effects (mail notice effects, card notice effects) executed at a later timing can be combined with any effect mode for the first step-up notice effect, but for the second step-up notice effect, “ The combination of “W → X → Y3” and “W → X → Y3 → Z3” is impossible. This is because the button notice effect and the notice effect Y3 cannot be executed at the same time because the button notice effect and the notice effect Y3 in which the notice image is displayed in full screen are overlapped with each other. is there. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S590), a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the button notice effect at the later timing to, for example, the effect mode of the button notice effect at the earlier timing is executed ( Step S591).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is an effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C →”) for executing the notice effect C for the first step-up notice effect. D "" A-> B-> C-> D-> E ") is impossible, and for the second step-up notification effect, an effect mode (" W-> X-> Y1 "for executing the notification effect Y1, Y2 or Y3) “W → X → Y2” “W → X → Y3” “W → X → Y1 → Z1” “W → X → Y2 → Z2” “W → X → Y1 → Z2” “W → X → Y3 → Z3” "W-> X-> Y1-> Z3" and "W-> X-> Y2-> Z3") are impossible. The timing at which the other system advance notice effect (see FIGS. 140 (6-5) and (6-6)) in which the advance notice image is displayed on the full screen overlaps with the timing at which the advance notice effect C is executed, and the advance image is also displayed. Since the timing at which the other-line notice notice effect that is displayed in full screen is executed overlaps with the timing at which the notice effect Y1, Y2, or Y3 is executed, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect and the notice effect C, and the other-system liquid crystal notice are displayed. This is because the effect and the notice effect Y1, Y2 or Y3 cannot be executed simultaneously. If it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S590), for example, the effect mode of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not executed, or the notice effect C and the notice effects Y1, Y2, and Y3 are not executed. A change (rewrite) process is executed (step S591).

  Since the movable object notice effect is executed by moving the movable member 78 around the effect display device 9 in the rain, the step-up executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9 is performed at any timing. It can be executed simultaneously with the notice effect. Therefore, the movable object notice effect can be combined with any effect form in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect.

  The presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect aspect determined as described above are stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (notice effect storage area) of the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects will be described. FIG. 126 is a timing chart showing execution timings of various notice effects in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 126, the other-system liquid crystal notice, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the mail notice (a kind of button notice), the card notice (a kind of button notice), and the mini character notice are displayed on the effect display device 9. Since this is a notice using an image displayed on the screen, these notices are called liquid crystal notices.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 126, the first step-up notice is a notice of step-up in order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (E) (“A → B → C → D → E ”). Here, step (A) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect A is being executed, step (B) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect B is being executed, and step (C) is the notice effect. Step (D) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect D is being executed, and step (E) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect E is being executed. Is shown.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 126, the second step-up notice is stepped up from step (W) to step (X), and stepped up from step (X) to step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3). This is a notice to step up from step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3) to step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3). Here, step (W) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect W is being executed, step (X) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect X is being executed, and steps (Y1), (Y2) ) Or (Y3) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect Y1, Y2 or Y3 is being executed, and step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3) is the notice effect Z1, Z2 or Z3 being executed. Indicates the stage (period). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, there is no provision of “W → X → Y3 → Y1” or “W → X → Y3 → Z2” effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. . Among the plurality of notice effects, the first step-up notice effect, the e-mail notice effect (early timing), the card notice effect (early timing), and the effect feather accessory notice effect are shifted to high-speed fluctuation. It is a notice effect that can be started at the time. Among the plurality of notice effects, the second step-up notice effect and the movable object notice effect are notice effects that can be executed at a time after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change of the effect design to the high speed change. ing. Among the plurality of notice effects, the mail notice effect (late timing) and the card notice effect (late timing) change from step (A) to step (B) in the first step-up notice effect (and the first). It is a notice effect that can be executed at the time of changing from step (W) to step (X) in the two-step-up notice effect. Further, among the plurality of notice effects, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is the time when the step (B) in the first step-up notice effect changes from step (C) (and step (X) in the second step-up notice effect). To the step (Y1), (Y2), or (Y3)).

  Thus, since the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started at different timings, it can be expected whether or not the notice is started for each of the plurality of step-up notice effects. . That is, if the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started at the same timing, when neither the first step-up notice effect nor the second step-up notice effect is started at that timing, There is a risk that the big hit expectation will not be expected and the interest of the game will be reduced. However, if the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are configured to start at different timings, Even if the step-up notice effect is not started, an expectation that the second step-up notice effect may be started can be given, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  In addition, the start timing at which the second step-up notice effect is started is a change in which step (A) in the first step-up notice effect is changed to step (B) from the start timing at which the first step-up notice effect is started. Within the period up to the timing. According to such a configuration, since the second step-up notice effect is started within the execution period of step (A) of the first step-up notice effect, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are performed. At the same time, the feasible period becomes longer and the interest can be improved.

  Further, among the plurality of notice effects, the start timing of the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash), the start timing of the first step-up notice effect, etc., and the start of the second step-up notice effect and the movable object notice effect Since the timing and the start timing of the other system liquid crystal notice effect are different, the player can have an expectation whether the notice effect will be started at the four start timings. The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, the first step-up notice effect is started first, and then the second step-up notice effect is started. However, the reverse may be possible. That is, the second step-up notice effect may be started first, and then the first step-up notice effect may be started thereafter. In addition, the start timing of other notice effects other than the step-up notice effect is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 126, and can be changed as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect have the same timing at which the notice effect changes (that is, the switching timing or the development timing). Specifically, when the first step-up notice effect is executed and the second step-up notice effect is executed, step (A) changes to step (B) and step (W) changes to step (X ), Step (B) changes to step (C) and at the same time step (X) changes to step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3), and step (C) changes to step (D) At the same time, step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3) changes to step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3).

  Here, the notice effect in the step-up notice of multiple systems “changes at the same timing (development, step-up)” means that the start-up effect start timing that can be perceived (recognized) by the player is simultaneous. Say. Specifically, in the effect example shown in FIG. 111, the timing at which the character A corresponding to the notice effect A appears on the screen and the timing at which the beetle character corresponding to the notice effect W appears on the screen are the same. The timing at which the character B corresponding to the effect B appears on the screen and the timing at which the beetle character corresponding to the notice effect X stops on the tree are the same. The timing at which the character C corresponding to the notice effect C appears on the screen and the notice effect The timing when the tree corresponding to Y1 swings in the wind is the same, the timing when the characters A, B, C corresponding to the notice effect D appear simultaneously on the screen and the time when the gull corresponding to the notice effect Z1 appears on the screen simultaneously. It is.

  In addition, as in the effect example shown in FIG. 111, in the effect that the step-up is established only by the character appearing on the screen, the timing (moment) at which the character appears on the screen is the effect start timing of the notice effect. In the case of a step-up notice when the screen changes, the timing (moment) when the screen changes is the start timing of the production of the notice effect. In the case of a step-up notice where the color or shape changes, the timing when the color or shape changes (moment) Is the production start timing. Also, in an effect in which step-up is established by the movement of the character, the timing at which the character's movement reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player is the effect start timing (for example, the position of the character, the speed of movement, the movement) When the number of times changes, the timing at which the player changes to a level that can be perceived by the player is the production start timing). Further, even in an effect in which step-up is established by the movement of the movable member, the timing at which the movement of the movable member reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player is the effect start timing (for example, the position of the movable member, The timing at which the player has perceived that the number of movements has changed is the stage start timing). In addition, even in an effect in which step-up is established by a change in sound, the effect start timing is a timing at which the sound change reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player. Further, even in an effect in which a step-up is established due to a change in lamp lighting, the timing at which the change in lamp lighting reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player is the effect start timing.

  As described above, when the step changes to the step (Y3) in the second step-up advance notice, it does not change to the step (C) in the first step-up advance notice (when developed to “W → X → Y3”) 123 and FIG. 125, it does not develop until “A → B → C” (see steps S588 and S589). Further, when the step changes to step (Z3) in the second step-up notice, it does not change to step (D) in the first step-up notice (when “W → X → Y1, Y2, Y3 → Z3” is developed) As shown in FIG. 125, it does not develop until “A → B → C → D” (see steps S588 and S589). When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (C), reach (normal reach, super reach) is determined. When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (D), the super reach is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 126, in this embodiment, at the timing when step (C) in the first step-up notice and step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3) in the second step-up notice are completed. The left symbol (first stop symbol that stops first) stops. In addition, at the timing when step (D) in the first step-up notice and step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3) in the second step-up notice are completed, the right symbol (second stop symbol that stops second) Stops. In this way, by synchronizing the stop of the effect symbol and the execution timing of the notice effect, the player can easily recognize the step (step) of the step-up notice effect of a plurality of systems. In addition, after the left symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (one), and the player can be made to pay attention to the stop symbol (right symbol, middle symbol) of the effect symbol. Furthermore, after the right symbol is stopped, the step-up notice can be prevented from being executed, and the player can be focused on the effect of the reach state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, the e-mail notice notifies the player that the e-mail has been received, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and opens the e-mail according to the operation of the operation button 120 of the player. The contents of the mail are notified, and the possibility of big hit is recognized according to the contents of the mail. It should be noted that in the e-mail notice, “E-mail 2nd stage” is an effect of opening the e-mail in accordance with the second operation button 120 operation by the player and notifying the contents of the e-mail. In the case of “2 levels of mail”, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of “1 level of mail”. In addition, the e-mail notice is executed at an early timing (start timing of the first step-up notice effect) and late timing (change timing from step (A) to step (B) in the first step-up notice effect) It may be executed in.

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, the card notice displays the card, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and releases the card in accordance with the operation of the player's operation button 120 (that is, turns over). The content written on the card is notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the content. Also, the card notice is executed at an early timing (start timing of the first step-up notice effect) and late timing (change timing from step (A) to step (B) in the first step-up notice effect) It may be executed in.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 126, the mini character notice indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the mini character to appear on the screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, skipping the butterfly) at the start of the change of the effect symbol. To recognize.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 126, the effect feather accompaniment notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect vane roles 79a and 79b when the effect symbol is changing at high speed. Let

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, the movable object notification is performed by operating the movable member 78 at a time point (first notification timing) when the change of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation, or in step (C) in the first step-up notification. By operating the movable member 78 at the time of execution (second notice timing) or by operating the movable member 78 at any timing (third notice timing) of the first notice timing and the second notice timing, Let the player know that there is a possibility. In this embodiment, when the movable member 78 is operated at the second notice timing rather than the first notice timing and at the third notice timing (that is, the first notice timing and the second notice timing) than the second notice timing. Increases the likelihood of a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, the frame advance notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by turning on the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern at the start of the change of the effect symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, the other-system liquid crystal notice is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 (with other liquid crystal notice) at the time when step (C) in the first step-up notice is executed. By displaying (an image different from the image), the player is made aware that there is a possibility of a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 126, other notices other than the step-up notice (the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice) are also issued at the timing of starting the notice effect in the step-up notice (or the change timing of the notice effect). It is configured to start execution. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the stage (step) of the step-up notice effect of a plurality of systems and the contents of other notice effects.

  FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing the button valid period in the button notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, the button notice (email notice, card notice) is started in synchronization with the start timing of step (A) and step (W) when executed at an early timing, and is executed at a later timing. Is started in synchronization with the start timing of step (B) and step (X). Then, the operation of the operation button 120 is validated from the start timing of the button notice, and the button valid period is started from that time. When a predetermined period (specifically, the execution period of step (B) and step (X)) has elapsed after the button notice starts, the button notice ends and the button valid period also ends. When the player operates the operation button 120 during the button valid period (when the operation button 120 is turned on), the mail notice changes from the message indicating that the mail has been received to the display that opens the mail, and the card notice indicates the card The display changes from the display in which the card appears to the card to rotate and release. In this embodiment, when the second-stage mail reception notification ("mail two-stage") is executed, the button valid period starts again, and mail is sent in response to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player. Is displayed.

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects will be described.

  First, a specific example will be described in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the first notice effect. FIG. 128 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the first notice effect in the second embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 128, the notice effect A → B → C → D → E is executed as the first step up notice, and the notice effect W → X → Y1 → Z1 is executed as the second step up notice, and the reach (super reach) is performed. Indicates the pattern that occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the start timing of the notice effect A of the first step-up notice is T1, the start timing of the notice effect W of the second step-up notice is T2, and the notice effect B and the first effect of the first step-up notice are shown. The start timing of the notice effect X of the two step up notice is T3, the notice effect C of the first step up notice and the notice effect Y1 of the second step up notice is T4, and the notice effect D of the first step up notice D4. And the start timing of the notice effect Z1 for the second step-up notice is T5, the start timing of the notice effect E for the first step-up notice is T6, and the stop timing of the middle symbol (the last stop symbol that stops last) is T7. Yes.

  FIGS. 129 and 130 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the first notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129, in the left middle right symbol display area 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 129 (1-1)), when the start condition is satisfied, The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation at the timing T1, and the character A210 is used as the announcement production A in the first step-up announcement in the first system announcement area 91 of the display screen of the production display device 9. An effect appearing from the right side of the screen is executed (1-2). At the timing T2, an effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen is performed as the notice effect W in the second step-up notice (1-3). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen. Thus, the start timing (T1) of the notice effect A in the first step-up notice and the start timing (T2) of the notice effect W in the second step-up notice are different timings.

  At timing T3, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is executed, and an effect in which the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice. Is executed (1-4). Thereafter, the character B211 goes to the right side of the screen.

  At timing T4, an effect in which the character C212 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed, and an effect in which the wind 200 blows and the tree 200 shakes as the notice effect Y1 in the second step-up notice. It is executed (1-5). Thereafter, the character C212 leaves on the right side of the screen.

  At timing T5, an effect in which the characters A210, B211 and C212 appear simultaneously from the left as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed, and the seagull 250 flies as the notice effect Z1 in the second step-up notice. The effect to come is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (1-6).

  At timing T6, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice is executed, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped, and reach occurs (FIG. 130 (1-7)). ).

  As described above, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice change (evolve) at the same timing, so that the player can perform any kind of notice effect even if the step-up notice of another system is executed at the same time. Can be easily recognized.

  FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the second notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 131, when the notice effect Y2 is executed from the state where the notice effect X is executed in the second step-up notice (the same state as FIG. 129 (1-4)), the second system notice area 92 is enlarged. Then, an effect that the wind blows and the tree 200 shakes in the enlarged second system notice area 92 is executed (FIG. 131 (1-5A). With such a configuration, the contents of the second step-up notice are emphasized. At this time, the first system notice area 91 is slightly reduced, and the character B211 appears in the first system notice area 91. This is because the first step-up notice is displayed. This shows a state in which the character B211 remains without leaving the screen because it ended with the notice effect B. However, the character B211 may not leave the screen when the first step-up notice ends. .

  Next, a specific example of the third notice effect will be described. FIG. 132 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the third notice effect in the second embodiment. The example shown in FIG. 132 shows a pattern in which a reach (super reach) is generated by executing a notice effect A → B as the first step-up notice and a notice effect W → X → Y2 → Z2 as the second step-up notice.

  FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 133, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (2-1), when the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. At time T1, the effect design changes rapidly, and in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. An effect to be executed is executed (2-2). At time T2, an effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect W in the second step-up notice (2-3). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen. Thus, the start timing (T1) of the notice effect A in the first step-up notice and the start timing (T2) of the notice effect W in the second step-up notice are different timings.

  At timing T3, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is executed, and an effect in which the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice. Is executed (2-4).

  At timing T4, the second system notice area 92 on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged, and the images in the second system notice area 92 (the image of the tree 200 and the image of the beetle character 220) are also enlarged. In the expanded second system notice area 92, an effect that the wind blows and the tree 200 shakes is executed as the notice effect Y2 in the second step-up notice (2-5). At this time, since the first step-up notice ends with the notice effect B, the character B211 remains in the first system notice area 91 without leaving the screen. Note that the character B211 may not leave the screen when the first step-up notice ends.

  At timing T5, in the enlarged second system notice area 92, an effect of flying the enlarged gull 250 as the notice effect Z2 in the second step-up notice is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped. (2-6).

  After that, at timing T6, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs.

  As described above, since the second system notice area 92 is expanded when the notice effects Y2 and Z2 in the second step-up notice are executed, the player is informed of the continuing second step-up notice effect. It can be noticed.

  Next, a specific example of the fourth notice effect will be described. FIG. 134 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the fourth notice effect in the second embodiment. The example shown in FIG. 134 shows a pattern in which the reach (super reach) is generated by executing the notice effect A → B as the first step-up notice and the notice effect W → X → Y1 → Z2 as the second step-up notice.

  FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fourth notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 135, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (3-1), when the start condition is satisfied, all the production symbols change. At time T1, the effect design changes rapidly, and in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. An effect to be executed is executed (3-2). At timing T2, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as a notice effect W in the second step-up notice (3-3). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen. Thus, the start timing (T1) of the notice effect A in the first step-up notice and the start timing (T2) of the notice effect W in the second step-up notice are different timings.

  At timing T3, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is executed, and an effect in which the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice. Is executed (3-4).

  At timing T4, in the second system notice area 92, an effect that the wind blows and the tree 200 shakes is executed as the notice effect Y1 in the second step-up notice (3-5). At this time, the second system notice area 92 is not enlarged. Since the first step-up notice ends with the notice effect B, the character B211 remains in the first system notice area 91 without leaving the screen. However, the character B211 may not leave the screen when the first step-up notice ends.

  At timing T5, the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged, and in the enlarged second system notice area 92, the gull 250 enlarged as the notice effect Z2 in the second step-up notice is displayed. The flying effect is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (3-6).

  After that, at timing T6, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs.

  Thus, since the second system notice area 92 is expanded when the notice effect Z2 in the second step-up notice is executed, the player is caused to pay attention to the continuing second step-up notice effect. be able to.

  Next, a specific example of the fifth notice effect will be described. FIG. 136 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the fifth notice effect in the second embodiment. The example shown in FIG. 136 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B is executed as a first step-up notice and a notice effect W → X → Y3 → Z3 is executed as a second step-up notice, and reach (super reach) occurs.

  FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fifth notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 137, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (4-1), when the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. At time T1, the effect design changes rapidly, and in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. An effect to be performed is executed (4-2). The beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as the notice effect W in the second step-up notice at timing T2 (4-3). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen. Thus, the start timing (T1) of the notice effect A in the first step-up notice and the start timing (T2) of the notice effect W in the second step-up notice are different timings.

  At timing T3, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is executed, and an effect in which the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice. Is executed (4-4).

  At timing T4, the second system warning area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged to display in full screen, and the images in the second system warning area 92 (images of trees 200 and beetle insect characters 220) are also displayed. Enlarged. Note that in FIG. 133 (2-5), the first system notice area 91 in which the notice effect in the first step-up notice can be executed remains, but in FIG. 137 (4-5), the first system notice area 91 remains. Therefore, the second system notice area 92 is enlarged in FIG. 137 (4-5) than in FIG. 133 (2-5). When the second system notice area 92 is displayed on the full screen, the image of the tree 200 is enlarged and the image of the beetle character 220 is also enlarged. In the second system notice area 92 that has been displayed in full screen, an effect that the wind blows and the tree 200 shakes is executed as the notice effect Y3 in the second step-up notice (4-5).

  At timing T5, in the second system advance notice area 92 that is displayed on the full screen, an effect that the enlarged seagull 250 flies as the notice effect Z3 in the second step-up notice is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is further executed. ) Is stopped (4-6).

  After that, at timing T6, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs.

  In this way, when the notice effects Y3 and Z3 in the second step-up notice are executed, the second system notice area 92 is displayed in full screen (that is, the second system notice area 92 is the first system notice area 91). And is displayed with priority over the first system advance notice area 91), so that the player can be made to pay more attention to the continuing second step-up notice effect.

  FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the sixth notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 138, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (5-1), if the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. In the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect that the character A210 appears from the right side as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice is started. It is executed (5-2). Then, at the start timing of the second step-up notice, an effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (5-3). At the same time, the moving member 78 provided around the display screen of the effect display device 9 operates as the moving object notice at the first notice timing (the effect that the dragon movable member 78 falls down). Is executed (5-3).

  Thereafter, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (5-4). At this time, the beetle character 220 is hidden behind the shadow (leaf) of the tree, and the second step-up notice has been completed.

  Thereafter, since the character C212 corresponding to the notice effect C in the first step-up notice does not appear (5-5), the player recognizes that the notice effect has ended. As a result, he recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is low and is disappointed. However, after the predetermined time has passed, an effect that the movable member 78 operates (an effect that the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed as a movable object notice at the second notice timing (5-6). As a result, the player has the expectation for the big hit again by recognizing that the notice effect is continued and the possibility of the big hit remains.

  FIGS. 139 to 140 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the seventh notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 139, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, when the left middle right effect symbol is stopped (6-1), if the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. Is started, and the change in the production pattern becomes a high-speed fluctuation. When the first step-up notice starts, the notice effect A in the first step-up notice is displayed in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9. An effect in which the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen is executed (6-2), and the character A210 goes to the left side of the screen.

  Thereafter, when the change timing of a predetermined step comes, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as a notice effect B in the first step-up notice (6-3), and the screen goes to the left screen. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, after the timing when the player recognizes that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (the character C212 does not appear) (6-4), the second system notice area 92 is displayed as the other system liquid crystal notice. As the image is enlarged to the entire area of the screen, the image of the tree 200 is enlarged, and the effect of enlarging the image of the cicada character 221 stopped on the tree 200 is also executed (6-5). Alternatively, as another aspect of the other system liquid crystal notice, as the second system notice area 92 expands to the entire area of the display screen, the image of the tree 200 expands, and the stag character that remains on the tree 200 An effect of enlarging the image 222 is also executed (6-6). The other system liquid crystal notice effect corresponds to the effects (6-5) and (6-6).

  Next, a specific example of e-mail notice will be described as the eighth notice effect. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an email notice as an eighth notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state where the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (7-1), all the variation of the effect symbols is achieved. Is started, and the variation of the production pattern becomes a high-speed fluctuation (7-2). When the e-mail notice start timing comes, the mail reception operation in the e-mail notice is performed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the production display device 9. "Display content 230", "operation button display content 231" and "Please open the mail by pressing the button!" (7-3). Thus, it is notified that the mail has been received, and the operation button 120 is prompted to operate. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 7-4). In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (7-4), the contents displayed in the letter are “...” that is not very likely to be a big hit, “chance” that is more likely to be a big hit than “...”, There may be a plurality of types of effects such as “extreme heat” with high possibility. In this case, in order to determine which production mode is to be executed, for example, a production mode setting table having different data depending on whether it is a big hit, whether it is a reach, or a super reach in the case of a loss. An effect mode may be selected from data based on a predetermined random number. At this time, when the data of the production mode setting table is determined to be a big hit in the pre-determination, the determination value of the random number is distributed so that “super heat” can be selected more easily than when it is determined to be out of place. In addition, determination values of random numbers are distributed so that “...” Is not easily selected.

  Next, a specific example of card notice will be described as the ninth notice effect. FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a card notice as the ninth notice effect in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (8-1), all the variation of the production symbols is achieved. Is started, and the change of the design symbol becomes a high-speed change (8-2). When the card notice start timing comes, the card appearance operation in the card notice is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. "Display content 235", "Operation button display content 231", and "Press the button to turn the card!" Are displayed (8-3). As a result, it is notified that a card has appeared and prompts the operation of the operation button 120. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time when no operation is performed), the card is rotated, and the display content 235 written on the card is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (8 -4). In this example, since the display content 235 of the card is “chance”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (8-4), the contents displayed on the card may be provided with the same production mode as the above-described mail notice. In this case, similarly to the mail notice, an effect form setting table for card notice may be provided, and the effect form may be selected in the same manner as the mail notice.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 changes the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display. The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are notified step by step to indicate that there is a possibility of a big hit, and the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are variably displayed. Since it can be executed at the same time during the same period, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve the interest. it can.

  In this embodiment, since the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are configured to start at different timings, the notice is started for each of the plurality of step-up notice effects. It can make you expect.

  In this embodiment, the start timing at which the second step-up notice effect is started changes the mode of the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect from the start timing at which the first step-up notice effect is started. Since it is within the period until the change timing, the second step-up notice effect is started within the execution period of the first notice effect (notice effect A) of the first step-up notice effect. The period during which the second step-up notice effect can be executed at the same time becomes longer, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can simultaneously execute the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect as the step-up notice effect during the same period during variable display, and during variable display. Since the control for changing the mode of the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in stages is executed at the same predetermined timing in FIG. Up notice effect (first step up notice effect, second step up notice effect) can be executed at the same time, and the stage of the step up notice effect of multiple systems (steps) can be easily made to the player Can be recognized.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the control CPU 101 for effect control changes the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect (for example, control for changing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y2 or from the notice effect Y1 to the notice effect Z2). ) Is executed, the display area (second system notice area 92) for displaying the notice image on the effect display device 9 is enlarged, so that the player can continue the second step-up notice effect. You can make an impression.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the first step-up notice effect in the first system notice area 91 (lower display area) in the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is The control is executed in the second system notice area 92 (background display area) in the effect display device 9 and changes the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect (for example, from notice effect X to notice effect 3). When the notice effects Y1 and Y2 are changed to the notice effect Z3), the second system notice area 92 is expanded across the first system notice area 91 (the second system notice area 92 is full screen). Therefore, it is possible to further emphasize the continuation of the second step-up notice effect to the player.

  In this embodiment, since a plurality of types of timings (such as “X → Y2”, “Y1 → Z2”) are provided as timings for executing the control for expanding the second system notice area 92, the second step Variations can be made in the aspect of the up notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where the second system notice area 92 is enlarged and a case where the second system notice area 92 is not enlarged are provided, and the specific game state is controlled when controlled to the specific game state (big hit). The second system advance notice area 92 is configured to be enlarged at a higher rate than in the case where the control is not performed. Specifically, in the second notice setting table shown in FIG. 118, when the big hit, an effect (notice effect Y2, Y3, Z2, Z3) that enlarges the second system notice area 92 is executed more than when it is off. Many judgment values are assigned to the production mode. According to such a configuration, when the second system advance notice area 92 is expanded and the player pays attention to the second step up notice effect, the specific game state (big hit) for the second step up notice effect is obtained. The reliability can be increased and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained according to the operation control CPU 101 and the operation of the operation means by the player. It is possible to execute the button notice effect (operation notice effect) to be notified, and the button notice effect is configured to be executed at the same timing as the change timing in the step-up notice effect. It is possible to easily recognize the step-up notice stage of multiple systems. In addition, since other system liquid crystal notice effects and movable object notice effects are configured to be executed at the same timing as the change timing in the step-up notice, even if multiple kinds of other notice effects are executed, The stage of the step-up notice effect can be easily recognized.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute the second step-up notice effect at a higher rate than the first step-up notice effect. Specifically, when the first notice setting table for determining the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 117 is compared with the second notice setting table for determining the second step-up notice shown in FIG. 118, More judgment values are assigned to each effect mode in the second notice setting table than in the first notice setting table (conversely, the first notice setting table has more judgments for “none”. A value has been allocated.) According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the second step-up notice effect in which the notice effect that the second system notice area 92 is expanded can be executed can be increased, and the player can It is possible to surely have an interest in enlargement, and the variation of the second step-up notice effect can be increased by expanding the second system notice area 92.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effects (button notification effects and card notification effects) are provided in advance as button notification effects, and the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the plurality of types of button notification effects. As a result, the variation of the button notice effect increases and the fun of the game is improved.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the second embodiment, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are provided at the same predetermined timing during variable display (for example, timings T3, T4, and T5 in the example shown in FIG. 128). The control for changing the mode of the notice effect in stepwise is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. In the third embodiment, the mode of the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect at different predetermined timings during variable display. It is comprised so that control which changes may be performed in steps may be performed.

  In the third embodiment, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, and other processes are performed by the same process as the notice effect setting process (see FIGS. 115 and 116) described in the second embodiment. A notice effect (movable object notice effect, button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect, etc.) can be determined.

  That is, in the notice effect setting processing shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to a non-reach deviation variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) has been received as a variation pattern command. (Step S571). If it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach shift pattern is received (Y in step S571), the first step up is performed using the first advance setting table for non-reach shift shown in the upper left of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the notice effect is determined (step S572).

  In this Embodiment 3, the aspect of the step-up notice effect different from the aspect of the 1st step-up notice effect used in said Embodiment 2 is used. Specifically, in the first notice setting table for non-reach out shown in the upper left of FIG. 143, the notice effect “none”, the effect mode (the development pattern of “A”) in which only the notice effect A is executed, and the notice The effect mode (the development pattern of “A → B”) in which the notice effect B is executed after the effect A is executed, and the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed. Effect mode (the development pattern of “A → B → C”) and the effect mode in which the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are sequentially executed after the notice effect A is executed (“A → B → C → D ”development pattern), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are executed in order (“ A → B → C → D → ”). E ”development pattern) and notice effect B after notice effect A is executed Announcement attraction C, announcement attraction D, the effect is produced that announcement attraction e are executed in the order (development patterns of "A → B → C → D → e"), are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode. The same applies to the other tables (FIG. 144) in the third embodiment.

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach shift shown in the upper left of FIG. 143, “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, No judgment value is assigned to “A → B → C → D → e” (the number of judgment values is 0). This is to prevent the occurrence of the advance notice effect C or higher when the reach does not occur, that is, to determine the occurrence of reach when the effect of the advance notice effect C or higher appears.

  In step S572, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S572, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. Contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S573).

  In this Embodiment 3, the aspect of the step up notice effect different from the aspect of the 2nd step up notice effect used in said Embodiment 2 is used. Specifically, in the second notice setting table for non-reach out shown in the upper left of FIG. 144, the notice effect “none”, the effect form (only the development pattern of “X”) executed only for the notice effect X, and the notice An effect mode (an extension pattern “X → Y”) in which the notice effect Y is executed after the effect X is executed, and the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed. Effect mode (the development pattern of “X → Y → Z”) and the effect mode (“X → Y → Z”) after the notice effect X is executed after the notice effect X is executed. z ") is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S573, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the second step-up notice determination random number SR8-2, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S571, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern is not received (N in step S571), the normal reach CPU 101 receives the command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern. Whether or not (step S574). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation is received (Y in step S574), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect is determined (step S575).

  In the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 143, the notice effect “None”, the effect form (only the development pattern of “A”) executed only for the notice effect A, and the notice effect A are executed. The effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed (the development pattern “A → B”), the effect effect in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed (“ A development pattern of “A → B → C → D”), and after the notice effect A, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (the development of “A → B → C → D”). Pattern), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are executed in order (the development pattern of “A → B → C → D → E”). After the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B and the notice An effect mode (an extension pattern of “A → B → C → D → e”) in which the output C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect e are executed in order, and the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed. However, after the notice effect A is executed, the effect mode in which the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed and then the notice effect D is executed (the development pattern of “A → B → one time end → D”). The notice effect B is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are sequentially executed (“A → B → temporarily end → D → E”). ) And the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are executed in order. Aspect (Development pattern of “A → B → End → D → E”) and notice effect A The notice effect B is executed after being performed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect e are sequentially executed (“A → B → end once → D → e ”development pattern). A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. It should be noted that the effect mode of “ending once” indicates an effect mode in which the notice effect is revived after making the player appear disappointed and the player is disappointed, and the player is pleased.

  In the first advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 143, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D → e ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D → E ”, and“ A → B → Temporary End → D → e ”are not assigned. The number of values is 0). This is for the purpose of determining the occurrence of super reach when an effect greater than the notice effect D appears.

  In step S575, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S575, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 144 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S576).

  In the second advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 144, the notice effect “none”, the effect form in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice effect X are executed. From which the notice effect Y is executed (the development pattern “X → Y”), and the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (“ X → Y → Z ”), and after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is executed, and then the notice effect z is executed (the development pattern“ X → Y → z ”). And after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is temporarily executed without being executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (the development pattern of “X → end once → Z”) is set. Has been. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. As in the case of the first step-up notice effect, the effect mode to “end once” is to make the player feel like the notice effect is once finished, then discourage the player and then revive the notice effect to please the player. The production mode is shown.

  In step S576, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S574, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the normal reach has not been received (N in step S574), the CPU for effect control 101 has received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the super reach. Whether or not (step S577). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation has been received (Y in step S577), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for super reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Then, the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect is determined (step S578).

  In the first advance notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 143, an effect mode having the same contents as that of the first advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 143 is set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S578, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the contents of the first step-up notice effect in step S578, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Is determined (presence / absence, production mode) (step S579).

  In the second advance notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 144, the same effect forms as those in the second advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 144 are set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S579, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S577, when it is determined that the CPU 101 for effect control has not received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from super reach (N in step S577), it is determined that the command corresponding to the big hit fluctuation pattern has been received. The contents of the first step-up notice effect (presence / absence, effect mode) are determined using the jackpot first notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 143 (step S580).

  In the first notice setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 143, the production mode having the same contents as the first notice setting tables for normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. 143 is set. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S580, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S580, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second jackpot second notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 144 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S581).

  In the second jackpot setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 144, the production mode having the same contents as the second notice setting table for normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Thereafter, the processes of steps S582 to S587 shown in FIG. 116 are executed, and the presence / absence of the moving object notice and the production mode, the presence / absence of the button notice production, the presence / absence of the frame notice production, the presence / absence of the mini character notice production and the production mode, The presence / absence of the effect vane notice announcement and the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect are determined.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect can be combined (step S588).

  Specifically, combinations shown in FIGS. 145 to 148 are conceivable as combinations of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. FIGS. 145 to 148 are explanatory diagrams showing whether or not a combination of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is possible.

  In this embodiment, as the first step-up notice effect effect form (development pattern), an effect form in which the notice effect changes twice (development in two stages) (an effect aspect of “A → B → C” or more) is executed. When this is done, the presentation mode ("X-> Y-> Z" or "X-> Y-> z") in which the previous-stage announcement changes twice (development in two stages) is performed as the second-step-up announcement production mode (development pattern). Is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more in the first step-up notice effect and an effect form “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” in the second step-up notice effect are executed simultaneously. Is prohibited. This is because, in this embodiment, when “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is executed as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect, for example, (9-9) in FIG. As shown in (9-12) of FIG. 153, since the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is expanded to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, this is displayed. At this time, it is not possible to execute the notice effect “C” of the first step-up notice effect executed at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (a character corresponding to the notice effect C may appear on the display screen. It is not possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146, when the production mode of “A → B → C” or more is determined as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, “X → The production mode of “Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” must not be determined.

  Therefore, as the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → C” or more effect modes (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”). ”“ A → B → C → D → e ”), and when the production mode“ X → Y → Z ”and“ X → Y → z ”are decided as the production mode of the second step-up notice production, As shown in FIG. 146, it is determined that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (N in step S588). And the process which changes (rewrites) the production | generation aspect of 2nd step-up notice effect to "X-> Y" which lowered step up by one step, for example is performed (step S589). When the production mode of “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, the production mode of the first step-up notice effect is, for example, step You may make it perform the process which changes (rewrites) to the production | generation aspect "A-> B" which lowered up one step or more.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication of two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and notice by executing two notice effects simultaneously on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as an effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination”. The production mode of “→ D → e” can be determined. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect B is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice is once ended, and thereafter, the notice effect D is executed so that the step-up notice is restored. Here, after the step-up notice is presumed to end, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect Z or z of the second step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is restored. It is effective to show it. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Therefore, as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → e”. When the production mode is determined, as shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, in step S 588, the production mode of the second step-up notice production (“X → Y → Z”, “X → Y → z”) Are determined to be possible, and it is determined that the second step-up notice effect effect mode (“none”, “X only”, “X → Y”) cannot be combined. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S588), the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is changed to, for example, “X → Y → Z” in which the step-up is increased by one or more steps (rewrite). ) The process is executed (step S589). Even if it is determined that the combination is impossible, other notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) If any of the above is confirmed and another notice effect is executed, the process of changing the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is not executed. After pretending that the step-up notice was once finished, another notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) was executed. This is for the purpose of causing the notice effect D to be executed and to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored.

  Further, in this embodiment, an effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” can be determined as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect X is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice has once ended, and then the notice effect Z is executed to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored. Here, after making it seem that the step-up notice has once ended, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect B of the first step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is revived. Is effective. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Therefore, when an effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 148, in step S588, the effect of the first step-up notice effect It is determined that only the combination “A → B” is possible as the mode, and it is determined that the combination with other effects is not possible. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 148, when the production mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, the production mode of the first step-up notice effect is “ It is determined that a combination with an effect mode (such as “A → B → temporarily end → D”) that is once finished is also impossible. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S588), a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to “A → B” is executed (step S589).

  In this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes twice or more (develops two or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → B → When the production mode “C” or more is executed, reach (normal reach, super reach) is always generated. Accordingly, in the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation in the upper left of FIG. For this reason, when reach does not occur (when a non-reach shift pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D ”,“ A → B → C → D → E ”,“ A → B → C → D → e ”) are not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 143, the reach confirmation effect modes (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A” → B → C → D → e ”)), it is impossible to combine the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in step S588 (reaching confirmation effect). It is determined that the execution of the aspect is impossible. In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B”) that is not reach determination is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes three times or more (development of three or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → Super-reach always occurs when a production mode of “B → C → D” or more or “A → B → end once → D” or more is executed. Accordingly, in the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation in the upper right of FIG. 143, determination values are assigned to the production modes of “A → B → C → D” or “A → B → Temporary End → D” or more. Not. For this reason, when super reach does not occur (when a normal reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “ "A-> B-> C-> D-> E" "A-> B-> C-> D-> e" "A-> B-> End once-> D" "A-> B-> End once-> D-> E" "A-> B-> End once → D → e ”) is not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper right of FIG. 143, the super-reach determination effect modes (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D”). → e ”,“ A → B → temporary → D ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → E ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → e ”)). In step S588, it is determined that the combination of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be performed (the execution of the super reach determination effect mode is impossible). In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B → C”) that is not super reach determination is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 combines a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and a button notice effect, and a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, first It is determined whether or not the combination of the two-step-up notice effect) and the other system liquid crystal notice effect is possible (step S590). Then, when it is determined that the combination is impossible (Y in step S590), a process of changing (rewriting) the content of another notice effect is executed (step S591). Note that the processes in steps S590 and S591 are the same as those described in the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a timing diagram illustrating execution timings of various notice effects in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the first step-up notice is a notice of step-up in order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (E) (“A → B → C → D → E ”), or an advance notice (“ A → B → C → D → e ”) from step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), and step (e). ]). Here, step (A) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect A is being executed, step (B) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect B is being executed, and step (C) is the notice effect. Step (D) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect D is executed, and step (E) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect E is executed. Step (e) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect e is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the second step-up notice is a notice that the step-up from step (X) to step (Y) and the step-up from step (Y) to step (Z) ("X → Y → Z "), or a notice (" X → Y → z ") that steps up from step (X) to step (Y) and steps up from step (Y) to step (z). Here, step (X) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect X is being executed, step (Y) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect Y is being executed, and step (Z) is the notice effect. The stage (period) in which Z is executed is shown, and step (z) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect z is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 149, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. . In addition, among the plurality of notice effects, the first step-up notice effect, the e-mail notice effect, the card notice effect, the production blade accessory notice effect, and the movable object notice are executed at the time when the change of the effect symbol is shifted to the high speed change. This is a notice that can be started. Among the plurality of notice effects, the second step-up notice effect is a notice effect that can be started at a time after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change in the effect design has changed to the high-speed change.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect differ in timing at which the notice effect changes (that is, switching timing or development timing). Specifically, when the first step-up notice effect is executed and the second step-up notice effect is executed, the timing at which step (A) changes to step (B) first is reached, and then the step ( X) changes to step (Y), then step (B) changes to step (C), and then step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z). Thereafter, step (C) is changed to step (D).

  Here, the notice effect in the step-up notice of multiple systems “changes (development, step-up) at different timings” means that the start-up effect start timing that can be perceived (recognized) by the player is different. Specifically, the timing at which the character A corresponding to the notice effect A appears on the screen is different from the timing at which the beetle character corresponding to the notice effect X appears on the screen, and the character B corresponding to the notice effect B appears on the screen. The timing at which the beetle character corresponding to the notice effect Y stops on the tree is different, and the timing at which the character C corresponding to the notice effect C appears on the screen and the tree and beetle character corresponding to the notice effect Z are expanded (all Timing of screen display is different.

  In this embodiment, when step (B) in the first step-up notice changes to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice does not change to step (Z) or (z) (“A When the process progresses from “→ B → C”, the process does not develop from “X → Y → Z or z” as shown in FIG. 146: see steps S588 and S589). When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (C), reach (normal reach, super reach) is determined.

  On the other hand, when step (B) in the first step-up notice does not change to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice can change to step (Z) or (z). In this case, step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z) after the player can recognize that step (B) has not changed to step (C). That is, step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z) after the time point when step (B) does not change to step (C) and the step-up notice is recognized to have ended.

  When the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are linked so that the first step-up notice is restored after the first step-up notice is finished, the second step-up notice step (Z) or (z) is used. In response to the change, step (D) in the first step-up notice is executed. With such a configuration, the player's expectations can be met effectively.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in the final step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (Z) or (z), the left symbol (first stop symbol that stops first) stops. Exit before. On the other hand, the step (C) in the first step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (C) is continued even after the left symbol is stopped, and the step (D), step S (E) or (e), that is, the notice effect (D). ) And the notice effect (E) or (e) can be executed even after the left symbol stops. According to such a configuration, after the left symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (to one), and the player can be focused on the stop symbol (right symbol, middle symbol) of the effect symbol. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 149, in the second step-up notice, step (X) is executed, and when step (Y) is executed, a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the second step-up notice is executed. . In addition, since the suggestion effect has a function of leaving a reverberation of the effect of the executed step (Y), the suggestion effect is also referred to as a reverberation display. In addition, the suggestive effect in the third embodiment is an effect in which a beetle perching on a tree is hidden in a tree (in a leaf) as shown in FIG. 152 (9-7), for example. .

  Here, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (Z), the step changes to the step (Z) as soon as the step (Y) ends, and the suggestive effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (z), the step changes to the step (z) after the lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the step (Y), and the suggested effect is the predetermined period. Executed.

  As described above, in the second step-up notice, when the process changes to step (Y), the suggestion effect is executed after the end of step (Y) and then the second step-up notice is finished, and step (Y) There are a pattern in which the step (Z) is executed without executing the suggestion effect after the end, and a pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined period after the end of the step (Y) and then the step (z) is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest about whether or not the next notice effect (step) continues after execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects in the third embodiment will be described.

  First, a specific example will be described in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the tenth notice effect. FIG. 150 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the tenth notice effect in the third embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 150, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E is executed as the first step-up notice, and the notice effect X → Y → Z or z is executed as the second step-up notice, and the reach (super reach) is executed. A notice effect A → B is executed as a first step-up notice, and a notice effect X → Y or X → Y → Z is executed as a second step-up notice, and a pattern that becomes non-reach is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the period from the start of the change in the design symbol to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is t1, and the second step up from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the start timing of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect A (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B and the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is defined as t2 as the period until the notice start timing. t3, from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect X of the second step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect Y, the change timing of the notice effect X to the notice effect Y) The period is t4 and the start timing of the notice effect Y for the second step-up notice. The period from the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect C) is t5, and the notice effect C of the first step up notice is started. The period from the timing (once in FIG. 150) to the end timing of the notice effect Y of the second step-up notice (that is, the notice effect Z or the start timing of the suggestion effect, the notice effect Y to the change timing of the notice effect Z or the suggestion effect) T6, the execution period of the suggestion effect is t7, and the end timing of the notice effect Z or the end effect of the notice effect z (ie, the second step up) from the end timing of the suggestion effect (that is, the start timing of the notice effect z) The time until the end of the advance notice) is t8, and the advance notice of the second step up notice The period from the end timing of the output Z or the notice effect z to the end timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect D, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect D) is t9, The period from the start timing of the notice effect D of the one step up notice to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect E to the notice effect E) is t10. The period from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is Tt11.

  151 to 153 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the tenth notice effect in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 151, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 151 (9-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. When the change of the effect symbol starts in the period t1, and the change of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed change in the period, the character A210 is displayed on the screen right as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The effect that appears from is executed in the period t2 (9-2). Then, at the start timing of the second step-up notice, an effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (9-3).

  Thereafter, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (9-4). At this time, since the change timing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y has not yet been reached in the second step-up notice (see FIG. 150), the beetle character 220 that is the notice effect X in the second step-up notice is An effect flying from the right side of the screen is continuously executed (see 9-4). This is an effect in the period t4. After that, while the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is being executed, the timing for changing from the notice effect X of the second step-up notice to the notice effect Y is reached, and the character B211 is moving in the left direction. In addition, an effect in which the beetle character 220 stops on the tree 200 as the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice is executed (9-5). This is an effect in the period t5. Thereafter, the character B211 disappears to the left of the screen, and the timing for changing from the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the notice effect C is reached, but the notice effect C is not executed, and the notice effect of the second step-up notice is given. Only the effect that the beetle character 220 stops on the tree 200 as Y is continuously executed (9-6). This is the effect in the period t6.

  Thereafter, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second step-up notice (when the notice effect X → Y or the notice effect X → Y → z is executed in the second step-up notice), the beetle insect character 220 is used as the suggestion effect. An effect disappearing behind the tree 200 is executed (9-7). This is the effect during period t7. Then, when the second step-up effect is finished as it is (when the notice effect X → Y is executed in the second step-up notice), the notice effect of the first and second step-up notices is not executed and the display screen is displayed. The off symbol (“146”) is stopped and displayed (9-8). On the other hand, when the notice effect z in the second step-up notice is executed, when the predetermined change timing after the suggestion effect (9-7) is reached, the background expands to the entire area of the display screen. As the tree 200 expands, the beetle character 220 also expands, and the effect that the beetle character 220 moves around is executed (9-9). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect z) in the period t8. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice, in which characters A210, B211 and C212 appear simultaneously from the left of the screen is executed (9-10). ) Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (9-11). This is an effect in the period t9 to t11.

  When the notice effect Z is executed in the second step-up notice, the tree 200 is enlarged and the beetle character 220 is enlarged as the background is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen without executing the suggestion effect. (9-12). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect Z) in the periods t7 and t8. After that, when it becomes non-reach which does not become reach, the shift symbol ("146") is stopped and displayed on the display screen (9-15). On the other hand, after that, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect in which character A210, character B211 and character C212 appear simultaneously, corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (9). -13). Furthermore, after the right symbol (“7”) stops and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as a notice effect E in the first step-up notice (9-14). This is an effect in the period t9 to t11. When the notice effect A → B of the first step-up notice is set, as shown in (9-10), (9-11), (9-13), and (9-14) The reach state is executed without executing the notice effects D and E of the first step-up notice.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, the mode of the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect is changed stepwise at different predetermined timings during variable display. Since the control is configured to execute, the change timing of the notice effect in the plurality of step-up notice effects is different, and the player plays the game while confirming the plurality of notice effects and expecting the occurrence of a specific gaming state. Can be further improved. Specifically, the player will have a big win expectation every time the step-up notice effect is stepped up (changed, developed), so the timing at which the player expects increases as the step-up timing increases. become. As described in the third embodiment, if the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are configured to have different step-up timings, the number of step-up timings increases accordingly. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, since it is configured to perform an effect that makes it appear that it has been restored after the step-up notice is once completed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the above first to third embodiments, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect effect mode (development pattern) are determined separately using different notice setting tables. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. In the fourth embodiment, a combination of effects of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is simultaneously determined using one notice setting table. It is composed.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach shift pattern is received, the effect control CPU 101 uses the non-reach shift notice setting table shown in FIG. 154 and FIG. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the production and the second step-up notice is determined.

  In the notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, the first step-up notice effect mode (including “none”) and the second step-up notice effect mode (including “none”) are shown. All combinations are set, and determination values are assigned to these combinations. Here, the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect is an effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”) more than the notice effect C. On the other hand, no judgment value is assigned (that is, the number of judgment values is 0). This is because, as described above, the reach is determined when it develops beyond the notice effect C.

  Next, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation is received, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the normal reach deviation notice setting table shown in FIGS. 156 and 157 for the first step-up notice. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the production and the second step-up notice is determined.

  156 and 157, the first reach-up notice effect mode (including “None”) and the second step-up notice effect mode (including “None”) are all included. These combinations are set, and judgment values are assigned to these combinations. Here, a determination value is assigned to an effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”) in which the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect is not less than the notice effect D. (Ie, the number of judgment values is 0). This is because, as described above, the super reach is determined when it develops beyond the notice effect D. Also, the first step-up notice effect is “A → B → C”, and the second step-up notice effect is “W → X → Y3” and “W → X → Y3 → Z3”. On the other hand, no judgment value is assigned. This is because, as described above, since the second system notice area 92 is displayed on the full screen in the notice effect Y3, the notice effect C cannot be executed at the execution timing of the notice effect Y3.

  Next, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines that it has received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation or the big hit fluctuation pattern, the notice setting table for the super reach deviation / big hit shown in FIG. 158 and FIG. Is used to determine the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the combination of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect.

  158 and 159, the first-step-up notice effect mode (including "None") and the second step-up notice effect mode (including "None") are set. All combinations are set, and determination values are assigned to these combinations. Here, the production mode of the first step-up notice production is the production mode (“A → B → C” “A → B → C → D” “A → B → C → D → E”). ) And the second step-up notice effect form “W → X → Y3” and “W → X → Y3 → Z3”, and the first step-up notice effect form executes the notice effect D or more. In the mode ("A-> B-> C-> D" "A-> B-> C-> D-> E"), the second-step-up advance notice mode is "W-> X-> Y1-> Z3" "W-> X-> Y2-> No determination value is assigned to the combination “Z3”. As described above, since the second system notice area 92 is displayed in full screen in the notice effect Y3, the notice effect C cannot be executed at the execution timing of the notice effect Y3, and in the notice effect Z3. This is because the second system notice area 92 is displayed on the full screen, and therefore the notice effect D cannot be executed at the execution timing of the notice effect Z3.

  Note that a notice other than the step-up notice (movable object notice, etc.) is determined in the same manner as in the second embodiment. In this case, whether or not the combination of the step-up notice and another notice is possible is also determined with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125, and a process of changing the notice effect according to the determination result is executed.

  Even with the configuration as described above, it is possible to determine the optimal combination of the production modes without duplication or contradiction of step-up notices of other systems. In addition, since the combination of the presentation modes of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice can be determined at the same time, the processing is simplified and the program capacity can be reduced.

  It should be noted that a configuration in which a combination of a plurality of system step-up notices and other notices (movable object notices, etc.) is set may be used to determine all the notices at once.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
In this embodiment, when a specific motif (for example, a specific pattern or pattern such as a cherry blossom pattern) is displayed during execution of a predetermined performance, the expectation of jackpot increases.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol variation start process in the fifth embodiment. In the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 160, a different configuration from the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 64 is a specific motif setting process (step for determining and setting whether or not to execute a specific motif during a predetermined effect) S517A) is provided. The other configuration is the same as the configuration shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the specific motif can be displayed at the following locations.

(1) Background:
A specific motif can be displayed on part or all of the background image (for example, the sky color of the background becomes a cherry blossom pattern).

(2) First step up notice:
A specific motif can be displayed on a character appearing in the first step-up notice (for example, a pattern of clothes of a human character).

(3) Email notice:
Specific motifs can be displayed in emails that appear in email notices.

(4) Card notice:
A specific motif can be displayed on the card that appears in the card notice.

(5) Second step up notice:
A specific motif can be displayed on the character appearing in the second step-up notice.

(6) Production design:
A specific motif can be displayed on the effect design (any one, two, or all of the effect designs of left, middle, and right) during a change or when a reach occurs.

(7) Reach production:
A specific motif can be displayed on the character during the reach production.

  In addition, said display location is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to such a display location, You may be comprised so that a specific motif may be displayed on another display location.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a specific motif setting process in the fifth embodiment. In the specific motif setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the specific motif on the background (step S1001). FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific motif determination table used for determining whether or not to display a specific motif in the background. The specific motif determination table shown in FIG. 162 is divided into a table for “big hit” and a table for “out of”, and in those tables, a predetermined determination value (1) for “non-display” and “display” Range of ~ 100). The effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number (background display determination random number) for determining whether or not to display the specific motif in the background, and uses the extracted random value and the determination value set in the table shown in FIG. 162. A comparison is made to determine whether they match. Then, “non-display” or “display” is determined based on the determination result. As shown in FIG. 162, when the big hit, it is determined that the specific motif is displayed on the background at a higher rate than when the big hit.

  It should be noted that a table similar to the table shown in FIG. 162 is used for whether or not to display a specific motif in the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the second step-up notice, the production symbol, and the reach production. However, the distribution of the determination values may be different from the distribution in the table shown in FIG.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the specific motif during the first step-up notice (step S1002). At this time, as in the process of step S1001, the effect control CPU 101 uses a random number (first step-up display determination random number) for determining whether or not to display the specific motif during the first step-up notice. The extracted random number value is compared with the determination value set in the specific motif determination table to determine whether or not they match. Then, “non-display” or “display” is determined based on the determination result. Also in this case, when the big hit, it is determined that the specific motif is displayed during the first step-up notice at a higher rate than in the case of a loss.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the specific motif during the mail notice (step S1003). Also at this time, as in the process of step S1001, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining whether or not to display the specific motif during the mail notice (mail display determination random number), and extracts the extracted randomness. The numerical value and the determination value set in the specific motif determination table are compared to determine whether or not they match. Then, “non-display” or “display” is determined based on the determination result. In this case as well, it is determined that the specific motif is displayed in the mail notice at a higher rate in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the specific motif during the card notice (step S1004). At this time, similarly to the process of step S1001, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number (card display determination random number) for determining whether or not to display the specific motif during the card advance notice, and extracts the extracted random number. The numerical value and the determination value set in the specific motif determination table are compared to determine whether or not they match. Then, “non-display” or “display” is determined based on the determination result. Also in this case, when the big hit, it is determined that the specific motif is displayed during the card notice at a higher rate than the case of the loss.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the specific motif during the second step-up notice (step S1005). At this time, as in the process of step S1001, the effect control CPU 101 uses a random number (second step-up display determination random number) for determining whether or not to display the specific motif during the second step-up advance notice. The extracted random number value is compared with the determination value set in the specific motif determination table to determine whether or not they match. Then, “non-display” or “display” is determined based on the determination result. Also in this case, when the big hit, it is determined that the specific motif is displayed during the second step-up notice at a higher rate than when the big hit.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to display a specific motif in the effect symbol (step S1006). At this time, as in the process of step S1001, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number (effect design display determination random number) for determining whether or not to display a specific motif in the effect design, and extracts the extracted randomness. The numerical value and the determination value set in the specific motif determination table are compared to determine whether or not they match. Then, “non-display” or “display” is determined based on the determination result. Also in this case, when the big hit, it is determined that the specific motif is displayed on the effect design at a higher rate than when it is off.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the specific motif during the reach effect (step S1007). At this time, as in the process of step S1001, the effect control CPU 101 extracts and extracts a random number (reach effect display determination random number) for determining whether or not to display the specific motif during the reach effect. The random number value is compared with the determination value set in the specific motif determination table to determine whether or not they match. Then, “non-display” or “display” is determined based on the determination result. Also in this case, when the big hit, it is determined that the specific motif is displayed during the reach production at a higher rate than the case of the loss.

  In the case of the configuration of the first embodiment, the first step-up notice, the mail notice, and the card notice are not executed at the same time (in order to determine the notice type using the notice type selection table shown in FIG. 79). ; See steps S571 and S572), there is a possibility that specific motifs may be displayed at a maximum of five places in the same variation.

  In this embodiment, when specific motifs are displayed at three or more locations with the same variation, the probability variation big hit is determined. That is, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not there are three or more display locations of the specific motif determined in steps S1001 to S1007 (step S1008). If the CPU 101 for effect control determines that there are three or more display locations for the specific motif (Y in step S1008), it determines whether or not a probable big hit has been determined in the current variation (step S1009). ). When it is determined that the probable big hit has been determined (Y in step S1009), control is performed to display a specific motif in the determined three or more display locations (step S1010).

  Even when it is determined in step S1008 that the number of display positions of the specific motif is not three or more (two or less) (N in step S1008), the production control CPU 101 displays the specific motif in the determined two or less display positions. Control to display is executed (step S1010).

  When it is determined in step S1009 that it is not determined that the probability change big hit is (N in step S1009), the CPU 101 for effect control changes the determined three or more display locations to two locations, and displays the changed display locations. Control for displaying the specific motif is executed (step S1011).

  Here, as the control for displaying the specific motif at the display location, for example, the following control is executed. A specific motif display flag indicating the display of the specific motif is prepared for each display position of the specific motif. The effect control CPU 101 sets a specific motif display flag corresponding to the display location determined in steps S1001 to S1007 or the display location changed in step S1011. Then, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the specific motif display flag is set when the display timing of the display portion of the specific motif is reached, and when the specific motif display flag is set, Then, a process of changing a normal motif at a display location of a character or the like to a specific motif is executed.

  According to the configuration as described above, a specific motif that suggests the possibility of a big hit can be displayed at a plurality of display locations. Can be improved. In addition, since the probability variation jackpot is determined when three or more specific motifs are displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of display locations of the specific motif. Interest is further enhanced.

  In addition, it is possible to apply combining said Embodiment 1-5 suitably. In particular, the first step-up notice effect described in the second and third embodiments is replaced with the first step-up notice effect including the main step-up and branch step-up described in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101, the change timing of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in the first embodiment is not different, as shown in FIG. 126 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, the same timing may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the first step-up notice (main step-up notice, first branch step-up notice, second branch step-up notice) and each notice effect in the second step-up notice are reachable. The announcement effect that is executed before the reach is performed, but it may be the announcement effect that is executed after the reach is established. It may be a notice effect that continues across the track).

  As shown in the second embodiment, a plurality of stages in which the second system notice area 92 is enlarged are provided (see FIG. 114). According to such a configuration, the variation of the second step-up notice can be increased, and the second step-up notice can be further noticed.

  In Embodiment 2 described above, the timing at which the second system notice area 92 is expanded is the timing at which the notice effect in the second step-up notice changes. According to this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the second system notice area 92 has been enlarged. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the second system notice area 92 may be enlarged during the notice effect. According to this configuration, it is not possible to know when the second system notice area 92 is expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the big hit control is performed rather than the case where the big hit control is not performed, the ratio that the effect that the second system notice area 92 is expanded is increased, but a predetermined reach (for example, super reach) does not occur. When a predetermined reach occurs, the rate at which the effect that the second system notice area 92 is expanded may be increased. Further, when the reliability of the big hit is high, the timing at which the second system notice area 92 is expanded may be advanced (or delayed).

  In addition, it is preferable that each of the notices shown in the above embodiments can execute a plurality of kinds of notice modes (effect modes of notice effects) in the notice. For example, in the first step-up notice, the notice effect A includes a plurality of different kinds of notice effects A1, A2, A3... (For example, the color of clothes of the character A is different). Further, the movable object notice and the effect blade accessory notice include a plurality of different movable aspects (movable speed, movable range, number of movements, etc.) as the movable aspects of the movable member 78 and the effect blade accessory 79. In addition, button notifications include multiple types of display content (for example, "...", "chance", "super reach", etc., multiple types of different characters, display colors even if the display content is the same) Are different, etc.). In addition, the frame lamp notice includes a plurality of types of light emission modes (light emission speed, light emission color, etc.) as light emission modes. In addition, the mini character notice includes different appearances of different mini characters and different mini characters. The other-system liquid crystal preview includes a plurality of types of preview images (for example, seminar images and stag images) as the preview images displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Thus, any one of the production modes included in the predetermined notice is selected and executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the step-up notice, the execution rate of the notice and the notice mode (the notice effect) are determined depending on which variation pattern is out of non-reach, normal reach, super reach, or big hit. The appearance rate is changed, but a notice setting table is provided for each variation pattern, and the notice value is executed according to the contents of the probability change pattern by changing the distribution value in each table. You may make it change a rate and the appearance rate of a notice aspect. For example, when the variation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, the execution rate of the step-up notification or the appearance rate of a predetermined notification mode may be improved.

  In addition, in the notices other than the step-up notice, the presence / absence of the notice and the appearance rate of the notice form (effect form of the notice effect) are changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit. A plurality of different notice setting tables are provided, and a plurality of different allocations are determined according to the determination result of the pre-determining means (out-going or big hit, the type of big hit in the case of big hit) or the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means. Any one of the notice setting tables may be selected, and the notice form to be executed may be determined based on the selected table and the notice determination random number. By configuring in this way, depending on the type of jackpot when it is a big hit in advance, execution of each notice depending on whether it will reach even in the event of a loss, and whether it will develop into a super reach at the time of reach The rate and the appearance rate of the notice mode can be determined. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, it is possible to improve the notice execution rate and the appearance rate of a predetermined notice mode.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the type of the variation pattern using the type random number, and determines the variation pattern in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number. However, the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the notice effect using the notice type random number, and determines the notice effect within the determined notice effect type using the notice effect determination random number. Also good. For example, it is impossible to simultaneously execute another system liquid crystal notice and a button notice executed at a later timing. The other system LCD notice displays a notice image (an image in which a cicada or a stag beetle is stuck on a tree; see FIGS. 140 (5-5) and (5-6)) in all areas of the display screen. This is because the button preview effect image cannot be displayed during display. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether to perform the notice of another system liquid crystal notice or the button notice as the notice effect type by using a preliminarily provided notice type random number, and then determines the decided notice type. (For example, as shown in FIG. 121 in the case of another system liquid crystal notice, as shown in FIG. 121, either “no notice” or “execution of notice”, as shown in FIG. 120 in the case of button notice) "No notice" "First mail notice (early timing)" "First mail notice (late timing)" "Second mail notice (early timing)" "Second mail notice (late timing)" "Card notice (early timing) ) ”Or“ Card advance notice (late timing) ”). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid selecting a combination of announcement effects that cannot be executed simultaneously.

  Further, if the type of the notice effect is determined by using the random number, the type of the notice effect is determined based on the table corresponding to the type of the decided notice effect. While changing the appearance ratio (without changing the distribution value in the notice type table for determining the type of the notice effect), changing the appearance ratio of the notice effect form (in the notice setting table for determining the notice effect form) On the contrary, the appearance ratio of the type of the notice effect is changed (although the distribution value in the notice type table is changed), but the appearance ratio of the form of the notice effect is not changed (the notice setting table). It is possible to easily realize a design change such that the distribution value in (1) is not changed. As a result, when changing the type of the notice effect and the appearance ratio of the notice effect according to the model change etc., it is not necessary to change all the data (table distribution values), and some data ( It can be easily realized only by changing the notice type table or the setting value of the notice setting table) (that is, it is not configured to determine the type of the notice effect after determining the type of the notice effect, When it is desired to change only the appearance rate of the production mode included in the type of the predetermined notice effect, or when it is desired to cause the type of the given notice effect to appear at a higher rate than the type of the other notice effect, the notice in each notice It is necessary to change all the contents of the table in which the aspect of production is set, and it is difficult to realize such a change). Since the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type random number and then the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type is determined, the same effect as the above case can be obtained. That is, the contents of the variation pattern determination table when only changing the appearance rate of the variation pattern included in the predetermined variation pattern type is desired or when it is desired to cause the predetermined variation pattern type to appear at a higher rate than other variation pattern types. Must be changed, and it is difficult to realize such a change.

  In each of the above embodiments, there may be a relationship between the two system step-up notices and the two special symbols. That is, the two system step-up notices may correspond to different special symbols. For example, the first step-up notice may be likely to appear during the change of the first special symbol, and the second step-up notice may be likely to appear during the change of the second special symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine provided with two special symbol displays (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) as a variable display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a special symbol display.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the present invention, the following configurations are also disclosed.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result. A game machine that is controlled to a state, and whether or not a specific display result is to be determined is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining the mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means, and a player operable When the notice effect is provided with an operation means, the notice effect can be executed in a step-by-step manner from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order, and a specific display result is obtained. The step-up notice effect includes a step-up notice effect that has a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until the specific display result is higher than the case where the specific display result is not included. A normal step-up notice effect capable of executing at least three stages of notice effects including an effect, a second notice effect, and a third notice effect, and a next step notice in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect A branch step-up notice effect that branches to an operation notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained according to the operation of the operation means by the player without changing to the effect, When the predetermining means determines that the specific display result is obtained, the normal step-up notice effect changes to the second notice effect, and the third notice In the branch step-up notice effect, the operation notice effect is executed without changing to the second notice effect after the execution of the first notice effect, rather than the selection ratio in which the effect of ending the notice effect without being changed is selected. A game machine characterized by determining a mode of an effect in a step-up notice effect using data for determining a notice effect that is set so that a selection ratio for selecting a mode of effect to be performed is higher. In such a gaming machine, the branch step-up notice effect is executed in the normal step-up notice effect as compared with the case where the second step notice effect is executed after the first notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect. Since the possibility of a specific display result (big hit) is higher in the case, the player will operate the operating means with great expectation when branching, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the game it can.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result. A game machine that is controlled to a state, and whether or not a specific display result is to be determined is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining the mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means, and a player operable When the notice effect is provided with an operation means, the notice effect can be executed in a step-by-step manner from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order, and a specific display result is obtained. The step-up notice effect includes a step-up notice effect that has a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until the specific display result is higher than the case where the specific display result is not included. A normal step-up notice effect capable of executing at least three stages of notice effects including an effect, a second notice effect, and a third notice effect, and a next step notice in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect A branch step-up notice effect that branches to an operation notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained according to the operation of the operation means by the player without changing to the effect, When the pre-determining means determines that the specific display result is to be obtained, the second preview is performed after the first preview is performed in the branch step-up preview The aspect of the effect that changes to the second notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and further changes to the third notice effect rather than the selection ratio in which the effect form in which the operation notice effect is executed without being changed is selected. A gaming machine characterized by determining a mode of effect in a step-up notice effect using data for determining a notice effect set so that a selection ratio to be selected is higher. In such a gaming machine, the player is more likely to win a big hit when the third step announcement effect is executed in the main step up announcement effect than when the branch step up announcement effect is executed. You will have greater expectations for the continuation (step-up) of the main step-up notice effect than branching to the up-notice effect, and you can maintain the expectation over a long period of time. Improvements can be made.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect that has a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the second notice effect that change in stages. A normal step-up notice effect that can execute at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a normal step-up notice effect that is not changed to the next-stage notice effect in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect. The step-up notice effect includes a branch step-up notice effect that branches to a different notice system effect different from the notice effect included in the step-up notice effect, and the notice effect executing means normally performs the first notice effect to the second notice effect in the step-up notice effect. Or when the second notice effect is changed to the third notice effect. Gaming machine for causing the. In such a gaming machine, the player can expect to change to the second notice effect at the same timing and continue to branch to another notice effect at the same time, and to further improve the interest. it can.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect that has a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the second notice A normal step-up notice effect that can execute at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a normal step-up notice effect that is not changed to the next-stage notice effect in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect. The step-up notice effect includes a branch step-up notice effect that branches into a different system of the notice effect included in the step-up notice effect, and the notice effect execution means executes the predetermined notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect. A gaming machine characterized by branching to a notice system of another system at an intermediate timing. In such a gaming machine, the player not only expects to shift to the next third notice effect during execution of the second notice effect in the main step-up notice effect, but also shifts to a different notice effect in the branch step up. Transition (branching) can also be expected, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result. A gaming machine to control the state,
Predetermining means for determining whether the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed before the display result of the identification information is determined, and the specific display result may be based on the determination result of the predetermining means. A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect to be notified and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means are provided. The notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages can be executed up to the stage, and when the specific display result is used, the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until the specific display result is executed is executed. The step-up notice effect includes a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a third notice effect that change in stages. Normal step-up notice effect capable of executing the above-mentioned notice effect, and normal step-up without changing to the next stage notice effect at the first branch timing, which is a stage in the middle of execution of the normal step-up notice effect A first branch step-up notice effect that branches to a first branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the notice effect, and a first branch timing that is a stage during the execution of the normal step-up notice effect A second branch step-up notice effect that branches to a second branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the normal step-up notice effect without changing to the next stage notice effect at the subsequent second branch timing; The notice effect determining means includes the first branch step-up notice effect when the prior decision means determines that the specific display result is Prediction effect determination data set so that the selection ratio for selecting the effect mode in which the second branch step-up notification effect is executed is higher than the selection ratio for selecting the effect mode to be performed. A game machine that determines a mode of effect in a step-up notice effect. In such a gaming machine, variations in the notice effect can be increased, and the player can be interested in the branch step-up notice effect, thereby improving the interest. In addition, since the branch step-up notice effect with a late branch timing has a higher reliability of the jackpot, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for branching for a long period of time, and to further enhance the interest.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the second notice A normal step-up notice effect capable of executing at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a next step notice effect at the first branch timing which is a stage in the middle of execution of the normal step-up notice effect. A first branch step-up notice effect that branches to a first branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the normal step-up notice effect without being changed, and the normal step-up notice effect is being executed Without changing to the next stage announcement effect at the second branch timing after the first branch timing, which is the stage of A second branch step-up notice effect that branches to a second branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect to be turned, and the notice effect execution means performs the second notice effect from the first notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect. Or at least one of the first branch notice effect and the second branch notice effect at the same timing as the timing of changing to the second notice effect or the second notice effect. A gaming machine. In such a gaming machine, variations in the notice effect can be increased, and the player can be interested in the branch step-up notice effect, thereby improving the interest. Whether the player changes to the second notice effect or the third notice effect at the same timing and continues or branches to at least one of the first notice notice effect and the second notice notice effect. Can be expected at the same time, and further improvement of interest can be achieved.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the second notice A normal step-up notice effect capable of executing at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a next step notice effect at the first branch timing which is a stage in the middle of execution of the normal step-up notice effect. A first branch step-up notice effect that branches to a first branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the normal step-up notice effect without being changed, and the normal step-up notice effect is being executed Without changing to the next stage announcement effect at the second branch timing after the first branch timing, which is the stage of A second branch step-up notice effect that branches to a second branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect to be turned, and the notice effect execution means is the first notice effect or the second notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect. A gaming machine characterized by branching to at least one branch notice effect of the first branch notice effect or the second branch notice effect at a timing during the execution of. In such a gaming machine, variations in the notice effect can be increased, and the player can be interested in the branch step-up notice effect, thereby improving the interest. In addition, the player not only expects the transition to the next second notice effect or the third notice effect during execution of the first notice effect or the second notice effect in the main step-up notice effect, but also the first branch notice effect. Alternatively, it is possible to expect a transition (branch) to at least one branch notice effect of the second notice effects, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the second notice A normal step-up notice effect capable of executing at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a next step notice effect at the first branch timing which is a stage in the middle of execution of the normal step-up notice effect. A first branch step-up notice effect that branches to a first branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the normal step-up notice effect without being changed, and the normal step-up notice effect is being executed Without changing to the next stage announcement effect at the second branch timing after the first branch timing, which is the stage of A second branch step-up notice effect that branches to a second branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect to be turned, and the notice effect execution means performs the second notice effect from the first notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect. Or at the same timing as the timing of changing from the second notice effect to the third notice effect, branching to one of the first notice notice effect or the second notice notice effect, and usually stepping up Branching to one of the first branch notice effect or the second branch notice effect at a timing during the execution of the first notice effect or the second notice effect in the notice effect Gaming machine. In such a gaming machine, variations in the notice effect can be increased, and the player can be interested in the branch step-up notice effect, thereby improving the interest. Whether the player changes to the second notice effect or the third notice effect at the same timing and continues or branches to at least one of the first notice notice effect and the second notice notice effect. In addition to expecting a transition to the next second notice effect or third notice effect during execution of the first notice effect or the second notice effect in the main step-up notice effect, A transition (branch) to at least one branch notice effect of the first branch notice effect or the second notice effect can be expected, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a second notice that change in stages. A normal step-up notice effect that can execute at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a normal step-up notice effect that is not changed to the next-stage notice effect in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect. A branch step-up notice effect that branches to a branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the step-up notice effect, and a branch notice effect of the next stage in the middle of execution of the branch step-up notice effect A special branch step that branches to a special branch notice effect of a different system different from the branch notice effect included in the branch step-up notice effect without change. When the pre-decision means determines that the specific display result is the specific display result, the notice effect determination means changes to the second notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and does not change to the third notice effect. The aspect of the effect in which the branch notice effect is executed without changing to the second notice effect after the execution of the first notice effect in the branch step-up notice effect, rather than the selection ratio in which the effect form at which the notice effect ends is selected. A gaming machine characterized in that a mode of effect in a step-up notice effect is determined using data for determining a notice effect set so that the selection ratio for selecting is higher. In such gaming machines, variations of the notice effect are abundant, it is possible to give interest to the branching of the step-up notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, in the main step-up notice effect, the possibility of a big hit is higher when the branch step-up notice effect is executed than when the second step effect is executed after the first notice effect. The player will have great expectations when diverging, and can further improve the interest of the game.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a second notice that change in stages. A normal step-up notice effect that can execute at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a normal step-up notice effect that is not changed to the next-stage notice effect in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect. A branch step-up notice effect that branches to a branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the step-up notice effect, and a branch notice effect of the next stage in the middle of execution of the branch step-up notice effect A special branch step that branches to a special branch notice effect of a different system different from the branch notice effect included in the branch step-up notice effect without change. When the predetermining means determines that the specific display result is obtained, the notice effect determining means does not change to the second notice effect after the execution of the first notice effect in the branch step-up notice effect. The selection ratio at which the aspect of the effect that changes to the second notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and further changes to the third notice effect than the selection ratio at which the effect of the branch notice effect is executed is selected. A game machine characterized by determining a mode of effect in a step-up notice effect using data for determining a notice effect set so that is higher. In such gaming machines, variations of the notice effect are abundant, it is possible to give interest to the branching of the step-up notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the possibility of a big hit is higher when the third step announcement effect is executed in the main step up announcement effect than when the branch step up announcement effect is executed, the player branches to the branch step up announcement effect. You will have greater expectations for the continuation (step-up) of the main step-up notice effect than you can, and you can maintain a sense of expectation over a long period of time, further improving the interest of the game it can.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a second notice that change in stages. A normal step-up notice effect that can execute at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a normal step-up notice effect that is not changed to the next-stage notice effect in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect. A branch step-up notice effect that branches to a branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the step-up notice effect, and a branch notice effect of the next stage in the middle of execution of the branch step-up notice effect A special branch step that branches to a special branch notice effect of a different system different from the branch notice effect included in the branch step-up notice effect without change. The notice effect executing means includes a timing to change from the first notice effect to the second notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect or the same timing as to change from the second notice effect to the third notice effect. A gaming machine characterized by branching to a branch notice effect of another system. In such gaming machines, variations of the notice effect are abundant, it is possible to give interest to the branching of the step-up notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the player can expect to change to the second notice effect or the third notice effect at the same timing, or to branch to another branch notice effect at the same time, and to further improve the interest. Can do.

  A specific game that has a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls to a state, and whether or not to make a specific display result is determined based on a prior determination means that determines before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, and a determination result of the prior determination means A notice effect determining means for determining a mode of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of a display result, and a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed, and when the specific display result is not used, the specific display result may not be used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are many stages. The step-up notice effect includes a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a second notice that change in stages. A normal step-up notice effect that can execute at least three stages of notice effects including three notice effects, and a normal step-up notice effect that is not changed to the next-stage notice effect in the middle of the execution of the normal step-up notice effect. A branch step-up notice effect that branches to a branch notice effect of a different system different from the notice effect included in the step-up notice effect, and a branch notice effect of the next stage in the middle of execution of the branch step-up notice effect A special branch step that branches to a special branch notice effect of a different system different from the branch notice effect included in the branch step-up notice effect without change. And a-up announcement attraction, announcement attraction executing means, a game machine, characterized in that branching to the informational display of another system in the middle of the timing when a predetermined announcement attraction in the normal step-up prediction effect is executed. In such gaming machines, variations of the notice effect are abundant, it is possible to give interest to the branching of the step-up notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the player expects not only a transition to the next notice effect during the execution of the predetermined notice effect in the main step-up notice effect but also a transition (branch) to another notice effect in the branch step-up. Can be further improved.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and particularly suitably applied to a gaming machine that executes a notice effect in an effect device (effect parts) such as an effect display device provided in the game machine. Is done.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation | movement of a movable member. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a jackpot determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a promotion production execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change promotion effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation performed according to the content of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 2nd step-up notification. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice classification selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reliability of jackpot when the predetermined notice effect is performed in the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reliability of jackpot when the predetermined notice effect is performed in the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable object step-up notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for selecting a frame advance notice effect, a production | presentation blade accessory notice effect, and another system liquid crystal notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for a mini character notice selection. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in case notice effect AD is performed as a 1st step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notice effect AD is performed as a 1st step-up notice. It is a timing diagram which shows a notice timing when notice effects A, E, and F are performed as the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notification effect A, E, and F are performed as 1st step-up notice. It is a timing chart showing notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and H are executed as the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notification effect A, B, G, H is performed as a 1st step-up notice. It is a timing chart showing notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and I are executed as the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notice effect A, B, G, I is performed as 1st step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect of the 1st step-up notice in Embodiment 2, and the content of each notice effect of the 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state by which the 2nd system | strain notice area is enlarged and displayed in the change timing of the 2nd step-up notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect (pattern) of the enlarged display of a 2nd system | strain notice area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state by which a 2nd system | strain notice area is expanded and displayed in the multiple types of change timing of a 2nd step-up notice effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a notice effect setting process in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a notice effect setting process in the second embodiment. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a first notice setting table in Embodiment 2. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a second notice setting table in Embodiment 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable object notice selection table in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a mail notice selection table in the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for selecting the other notice effect in Embodiment 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice in the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice in the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice in the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing execution timings of various notice effects in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a timing diagram showing a button valid period in the button notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing a notice timing in a specific example of the first notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the second notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the third notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the fourth notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fourth notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the fifth notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fifth notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the sixth notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the seventh notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the seventh notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an eighth notice effect in the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the ninth notice effect in the second embodiment. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a first notice setting table in Embodiment 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a second notice setting table in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a combination of a first step-up notice, a second step-up notice, a movable object notice, a button notice, and another system liquid crystal notice is possible in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a combination of a first step-up notice, a second step-up notice, a movable object notice, a button notice, and another system liquid crystal notice is possible in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a combination of a first step-up notice, a second step-up notice, a movable object notice, a button notice, and another system liquid crystal notice is possible in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a combination of a first step-up notice, a second step-up notice, a movable object notice, a button notice, and another system liquid crystal notice is possible in the third embodiment. FIG. 38 is a timing diagram showing execution timings of various notice effects in the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing in a specific example of the tenth notice effect in the third embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the tenth notice effect in the third embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the tenth notice effect in the third embodiment. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the tenth notice effect in the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification setting table at the time of non-reach deviation in Embodiment 4. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification setting table at the time of non-reach deviation in Embodiment 4. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice setting table at the time of the normal reach deviation in Embodiment 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice setting table at the time of the normal reach deviation in Embodiment 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice setting table at the time of the normal reach deviation in Embodiment 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice setting table at the time of the normal reach deviation in Embodiment 4. 10 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol variation start process in the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific motif setting process in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific motif determination table in the fifth embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 15 Variable winning ball device 9a 1st decoration symbol display device 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 18c Total hold memory display 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
78 Movable members 79a, 79b Production vanes (a kind of movable members)
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Production control board 100 Microcomputer for production control

Claims (5)

A variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result, a specification that is advantageous to the player A gaming machine that controls the gaming state,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to make the specific display result before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the notice effect determination means for determining the aspect of the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of becoming the specific display result;
A notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means,
The notice effect can execute a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step from a single step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. When the specific display result is used, the specific display result is not used. Including a step-up notice effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until many stages,
The step-up notice effect includes a normal step-up notice effect capable of executing at least three stages of notice effects including a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a third notice effect that change in stages, and the normal step-up effect. Branch step-up notice effect for executing a different system of notice effect different from the notice effect included in the normal step-up notice effect without changing to the next-stage notice effect in the middle of the execution of the notice effect. Including
The notice effect execution means starts the separate system notice effect at a timing in the middle of execution of the predetermined notice effect in the normal step up notice effect when the branch step-up notice effect is executed. To play. Step-up notice effects include special step-up notice effects different from normal step-up notice effects and branch step-up notice effects,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice effect execution means can simultaneously execute the normal step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect as the step-up notice effect during the same period during variable display. The game according to claim 2, wherein the notice effect executing means executes control for stepwise changing the form of the notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect at different predetermined timings during variable display. Machine. The notice effect execution means executes control for stepwise changing the form of the notice effect in the normal step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect at the same predetermined timing during variable display. Gaming machine. Reach determining means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the prior determination means;
A variation pattern type determination unit that determines the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on at least one of the determination result of the prior determination unit or the determination result of the reach determination unit;
A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the identification information from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determining means;
5. An effect operation executing means for executing an effect operation including a variable display of the identification information during a variable display of the identification information corresponding to a determination result of the variation pattern determining means. A gaming machine according to any of the above.

Images